Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
1e7db2e9 | 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15 |
c494f663 | 2 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | ||
5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
3787e12e | 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 | 7 | |
ad8d610b KS |
8 | Temporary note: |
9 | +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated. | |
10 | --- means no change in the manuals is called for. | |
11 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1a0b9ae4 | 12 | so we will look at it and add it to the manual. |
ad8d610b | 13 | |
05197f40 | 14 | \f |
d278091b | 15 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
76fb24bb | 16 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 17 | --- |
d2a53bb7 PJ |
18 | ** Emacs can now be built without sound support. |
19 | ||
4208da83 SM |
20 | ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. |
21 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 22 | --- |
76fb24bb PJ |
23 | ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', |
24 | `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of | |
25 | installed programs. | |
26 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 27 | --- |
81f755ae | 28 | ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game |
672ab90b CW |
29 | scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal |
30 | place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the | |
31 | configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses | |
32 | to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access | |
5167cfda CW |
33 | to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately |
34 | in each user's home directory. | |
81f755ae | 35 | |
cd7d2d9e EZ |
36 | --- |
37 | ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution. | |
38 | You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build | |
39 | Emacs with Leim. | |
40 | ||
4e5cdb4f KS |
41 | +++ |
42 | ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution. | |
43 | ||
44 | The ELisp reference manual in Info format is built as part of the | |
45 | Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User | |
46 | Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy | |
47 | accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference). | |
48 | ||
49 | --- | |
50 | ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of | |
51 | the distribution. | |
52 | ||
53 | This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed, | |
54 | together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu | |
55 | item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible | |
56 | (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). | |
57 | ||
73791277 EZ |
58 | --- |
59 | ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added. | |
60 | ||
a17b3614 | 61 | --- |
1096bcc0 GM |
62 | ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. |
63 | ||
a17b3614 EZ |
64 | --- |
65 | ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 was added. | |
66 | ||
84913e36 EZ |
67 | --- |
68 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added. | |
69 | ||
82e119fb EZ |
70 | --- |
71 | ** Support for MacOS X was added. | |
72 | See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. | |
73 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 74 | --- |
3fa4ac47 | 75 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added. |
16927a56 | 76 | |
d2d70cb6 | 77 | --- |
4e5cdb4f KS |
78 | ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. |
79 | ||
80 | --- | |
81 | ** A French translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available. | |
82 | ||
83 | \f | |
84 | * Changes in Emacs 21.4 | |
d2d70cb6 | 85 | |
5ab0ceed RS |
86 | ** Init file changes |
87 | ||
88 | You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under | |
89 | ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place. | |
90 | ||
a1b4049d BW |
91 | ** MH-E changes. |
92 | ||
bdcfe844 | 93 | Upgraded to mh-e version 7.0. There have been major changes since |
a1b4049d BW |
94 | version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. |
95 | ||
5b8b9fa7 SM |
96 | +++ |
97 | ** The `emacsclient' understand the options `--eval' and `--display' | |
98 | which tell Emacs resp. to evaluate the given elisp expressions and | |
99 | to use the given display when visiting files. | |
100 | ||
f5d0cc77 RS |
101 | +++ |
102 | ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. | |
103 | When the file is maintained under version control, that information | |
104 | appears between the position information and the major mode. | |
2c37653c | 105 | |
957e7c38 RS |
106 | ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer |
107 | against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. | |
108 | ||
2e4e635a RS |
109 | +++ |
110 | ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this | |
111 | for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the | |
112 | top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To | |
113 | control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x | |
114 | set-fringe-style. | |
555c87d8 | 115 | |
2e4e635a | 116 | +++ |
d7b590b1 MR |
117 | ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you |
118 | to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This | |
119 | directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to | |
120 | "~/". | |
121 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 122 | +++ |
af7272b1 RS |
123 | ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify |
124 | read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you | |
125 | want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you will in fact be able | |
126 | to alter the file.) | |
127 | ||
cc305a60 RS |
128 | ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) |
129 | revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. | |
130 | ||
dacec596 | 131 | --- |
cc305a60 | 132 | ** `ps-print' can now print Unicode characters. |
dacec596 EZ |
133 | |
134 | Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with | |
135 | ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts. | |
136 | See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. | |
137 | ||
b03763f4 EZ |
138 | --- |
139 | ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and | |
140 | `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed | |
141 | in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. | |
142 | ||
143 | `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays | |
144 | leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. | |
145 | If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories will be | |
146 | shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil | |
147 | and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. | |
148 | ||
149 | `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes | |
150 | the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is | |
151 | t, and the status is shown. | |
152 | ||
153 | Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time | |
154 | the Buffers menu is regenerated. | |
155 | ||
2e4e635a | 156 | +++ |
4d3eda1c | 157 | ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window |
2e4e635a RS |
158 | now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are |
159 | specified for that character, the commands by default customize those | |
160 | faces. | |
4d3eda1c | 161 | |
fc2938d1 DL |
162 | ** New language environments: French, Cyrillic-KOI8-U, Windows-1251, |
163 | Cyrillic-KOI8-T, Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, | |
164 | Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian. | |
165 | ||
813f3d41 | 166 | --- |
fc2938d1 DL |
167 | ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, |
168 | ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer, | |
169 | vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, | |
170 | latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml, | |
171 | bulgarian-phonetic, dutch. | |
172 | ||
813f3d41 RS |
173 | --- |
174 | ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese | |
175 | in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, | |
176 | Big 5 is then converted to CNS. | |
177 | ||
178 | --- | |
fc2938d1 DL |
179 | ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages' |
180 | library. These include complete versions of most of those in | |
181 | codepage.el, based Unicode mappings. | |
182 | ||
183 | ** The utf-8 coding system has been enhanced. Untranslatable utf-8 | |
184 | sequences (mostly representing CJK characters) are composed into | |
185 | single quasi-characters. By loading the library utf-8-subst, you can | |
186 | arrange to translate many utf-8 CJK character sequences into real | |
187 | Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS system. The utf-8 | |
188 | coding system will now encode characters from most of Emacs's | |
189 | one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. | |
190 | ||
191 | ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its | |
192 | Unicode. | |
193 | ||
1c6576ab | 194 | +++ |
fc2938d1 DL |
195 | ** Limited support for character unification has been added. |
196 | Emacs now knows how to translate Latin-N chars between their charset | |
197 | and some other Latin-N charset or Unicode. By default this | |
198 | translation will happen automatically on encoding. Quail input | |
199 | methods use the translations to make the input conformant with the | |
200 | encoding of the buffer in which it's being used where possible. | |
201 | ||
202 | You can force a more complete unification with the user option | |
203 | unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets | |
204 | into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and | |
205 | mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. | |
206 | ||
207 | ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into | |
208 | either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, | |
209 | when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is | |
210 | controlled by user option utf-8-fragment-on-decoding. | |
8f9891ab | 211 | |
2a1e884e | 212 | --- |
2e4e635a | 213 | ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. |
5a597a71 SM |
214 | On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual |
215 | amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). | |
216 | ||
267bdad3 EZ |
217 | +++ |
218 | ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. | |
219 | The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in | |
220 | default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' | |
221 | cursor does. | |
222 | ||
c0e48b0b RS |
223 | ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in |
224 | various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on | |
225 | program files that include other program files. | |
226 | ||
227 | Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on | |
228 | all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing | |
229 | in them. | |
230 | ||
172f1af1 EZ |
231 | --- |
232 | ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers | |
233 | when Emacs visits them. | |
234 | ||
2a1e884e | 235 | --- |
ded0c207 EZ |
236 | ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. |
237 | ||
238 | `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By | |
239 | default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed | |
240 | automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. | |
241 | ||
2e4e635a | 242 | +++ |
d5ec54b6 KS |
243 | ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is |
244 | now shown as a hollow box or a thin bar. However, you can control how | |
245 | it blinks off by setting the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. | |
246 | ||
3bdb7f80 | 247 | |
16425473 | 248 | +++ |
60ddd063 | 249 | ** Emacs now supports compound-text Extended Segments in X selections. |
9eb53288 EZ |
250 | |
251 | Some versions of X, notably XFree86, use Extended Segments to encode | |
252 | in X selections characters that belong to character sets which are not | |
948998d2 EZ |
253 | part of the list of approved standard encodings defined by the ICCCM |
254 | spec. Examples of such non-standard encodings include ISO 8859-14, ISO | |
16425473 EZ |
255 | 8859-15, KOI8-R, and BIG5. The new coding system |
256 | `compound-text-with-extensions' supports these extensions, and is now | |
257 | used by default for encoding and decoding X selections. If you don't | |
258 | want this support, set `selection-coding-system' to `compound-text'. | |
9eb53288 | 259 | |
63a4cd16 EZ |
260 | +++ |
261 | ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. | |
63a7fdcf EZ |
262 | The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from |
263 | the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling | |
264 | will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. | |
1a667242 | 265 | |
63a7fdcf EZ |
266 | The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic |
267 | hscrolling will scroll the window when point gets too close to the | |
268 | window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the | |
269 | window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how | |
270 | many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it | |
271 | gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. | |
272 | ||
813f3d41 RS |
273 | The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to |
274 | `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. | |
275 | ||
2a1e884e | 276 | +++ |
63bfbe6f RS |
277 | ** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced |
278 | by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold | |
279 | command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold | |
280 | TeX commands to use at startup. | |
281 | ||
2a1e884e | 282 | +++ |
78d4f409 | 283 | ** New display feature: focus follows mouse. If you set the variable |
45e3679d PJ |
284 | mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a different |
285 | Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can be selected | |
286 | only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this feature is not | |
287 | enabled. | |
3996d07a | 288 | |
1c6576ab RS |
289 | +++ |
290 | ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with | |
291 | description various information about a character, including its | |
292 | encodings and syntax, its text properties, overlays, and widgets at | |
293 | point. You can get more information about some of them, by clicking | |
294 | on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. | |
c145bbb3 | 295 | |
81f755ae CW |
296 | +++ |
297 | ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can | |
298 | search multiple buffers. There is also a new command | |
299 | `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the | |
300 | buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been | |
301 | rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes. | |
302 | ||
2a1e884e | 303 | +++ |
b2bd7aff RS |
304 | ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse |
305 | is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you | |
306 | can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the | |
307 | mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can | |
308 | also disable mouse highlighting. | |
90e87070 | 309 | |
2a1e884e | 310 | +++ |
fd42af9d SM |
311 | ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that |
312 | an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment, | |
313 | font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red | |
314 | if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause | |
315 | trouble with fontification and/or indentation. | |
316 | ||
236f1c76 EZ |
317 | +++ |
318 | ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. | |
319 | Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the | |
320 | variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the | |
321 | prompt string. | |
322 | ||
9a770d8d | 323 | +++ |
fd4f8b36 KS |
324 | ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line |
325 | of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display | |
326 | the mode line of the currently selected window. | |
327 | ||
89f8199f KS |
328 | The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether |
329 | the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. | |
330 | ||
2e4e635a | 331 | --- |
1f600b1b | 332 | ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". |
2e4e635a RS |
333 | This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such |
334 | as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). | |
335 | You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn | |
336 | it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of | |
337 | current date and time, current line and column number in the | |
338 | mode-line. | |
1f600b1b | 339 | |
2e4e635a | 340 | --- |
a9c6d330 PA |
341 | ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". |
342 | ||
2a1e884e RS |
343 | +++ |
344 | ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mails | |
345 | in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option | |
7c961dc2 | 346 | `display-time-mail-directory'. |
2d4ef682 | 347 | |
90e0f637 EZ |
348 | +++ |
349 | ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave | |
350 | like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far | |
351 | as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t | |
352 | (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it | |
353 | visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option | |
354 | is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes | |
355 | to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does. | |
356 | ||
357 | This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the | |
358 | NEWS. | |
359 | ||
a4fc6fc9 PJ |
360 | --- |
361 | ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. | |
362 | ||
e58d8457 | 363 | +++ |
5e101746 | 364 | ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. |
e58d8457 | 365 | M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no |
5e101746 RS |
366 | argument it toggles the mode. |
367 | ||
368 | Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings | |
369 | that were replaced by turning on the mode. | |
370 | ||
2e4e635a | 371 | +++ |
b54cfb55 CW |
372 | ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line |
373 | arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash | |
374 | disables the splash screen; see also the variable | |
375 | `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as | |
376 | `inhibit-splash-screen'). | |
377 | ||
7cc8f35a EZ |
378 | ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals |
379 | ||
e0c124ce | 380 | +++ |
7cc8f35a | 381 | *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard |
e0c124ce EZ |
382 | mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character |
383 | terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal | |
384 | database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't | |
385 | set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable | |
386 | terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' | |
387 | when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors | |
388 | in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the | |
389 | user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. | |
390 | ||
7cc8f35a EZ |
391 | --- |
392 | *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more | |
393 | than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and | |
394 | 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup | |
395 | the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for | |
396 | all of these colors. | |
397 | ||
398 | --- | |
399 | *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. | |
400 | ||
6625fc7d EZ |
401 | +++ |
402 | ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. | |
403 | ||
404 | When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options | |
405 | `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame | |
406 | whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire | |
616d7a51 | 407 | screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) |
6625fc7d | 408 | |
1c6576ab RS |
409 | --- |
410 | ** Info-index offers completion. | |
59b59892 | 411 | |
1c6576ab | 412 | --- |
0edda6b8 CW |
413 | ** shell-mode now supports programmable completion using `pcomplete'. |
414 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 415 | --- |
a8f57660 | 416 | ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files |
2b6bb1f2 | 417 | automatically. |
cb8d4d07 | 418 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 419 | +++ |
4e3dd7cf MB |
420 | ** The new command `comint-input-previous-argument' in comint-derived |
421 | modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines, | |
422 | like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but | |
423 | otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. | |
424 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 425 | +++ |
00b1ee61 RS |
426 | ** Changes in C-h bindings: |
427 | ||
428 | C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. | |
429 | ||
430 | C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files | |
431 | that do not change: | |
432 | ||
433 | C-h C-f displays the FAQ. | |
434 | C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. | |
435 | ||
436 | The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | |
437 | have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | |
438 | ||
93607efd KS |
439 | C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. |
440 | ||
441 | - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) | |
442 | run by the key sequence. | |
443 | ||
444 | - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the | |
445 | command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run | |
446 | that command. | |
447 | ||
448 | For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped | |
bf8dd4e3 | 449 | to new-kill-line, these commands now report: |
93607efd KS |
450 | |
451 | - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: | |
452 | C-k runs the command new-kill-line | |
453 | ||
454 | - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: | |
455 | kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> | |
456 | ||
457 | - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: | |
458 | new-kill-line is on C-k | |
459 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 460 | +++ |
a207b33c RS |
461 | ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, |
462 | making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the | |
463 | command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, | |
464 | bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. | |
465 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 466 | +++ |
d9f7eb77 RS |
467 | ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can |
468 | be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable | |
469 | `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion | |
470 | of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. | |
471 | ||
1c6576ab | 472 | +++ |
b54cfb55 CW |
473 | ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using |
474 | M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable | |
475 | `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification, | |
476 | remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'. | |
477 | ||
1c6576ab | 478 | +++ |
4e3dd7cf MB |
479 | ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line |
480 | by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep will automatically | |
481 | detect whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. | |
482 | When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed | |
483 | unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated | |
484 | command lines to be used than was possible before. | |
485 | ||
1c6576ab | 486 | --- |
4e3dd7cf MB |
487 | ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. |
488 | In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding | |
489 | check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection | |
490 | for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make | |
491 | sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking | |
492 | its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in | |
493 | case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. | |
494 | ||
3116d142 | 495 | +++ |
c721078e RS |
496 | ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, |
497 | the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. | |
498 | You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" | |
499 | under the "[State]" button. | |
500 | ||
2b6bb1f2 RS |
501 | +++ |
502 | ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program | |
4febb0e7 RS |
503 | counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). |
504 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 505 | --- |
ca64d378 | 506 | ** GUD mode improvements for jdb: |
a1e3dda0 RS |
507 | |
508 | *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class | |
509 | information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all | |
510 | source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain | |
511 | lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' | |
512 | and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. | |
513 | ||
514 | *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) | |
515 | set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack | |
516 | traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish | |
517 | (gud-finish). | |
518 | ||
519 | *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb | |
520 | (Java 1.1 jdb). | |
521 | ||
522 | *** The previous method of searching for source files has been | |
523 | preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. | |
524 | Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil. | |
525 | ||
526 | Added Customization Variables | |
527 | ||
528 | *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb. | |
529 | ||
530 | *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching | |
531 | method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for | |
532 | java sources (previous method). | |
533 | ||
534 | *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java | |
535 | classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath | |
536 | is nil). | |
537 | ||
538 | Minor Improvements | |
539 | ||
540 | *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. | |
541 | ||
1c6576ab | 542 | +++ |
43a88bc1 SM |
543 | ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display |
544 | to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly | |
545 | changes the behavior of motion commands line C-e and C-p. | |
546 | ||
1c6576ab | 547 | +++ |
8f3f2fe5 RS |
548 | ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now |
549 | control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded | |
550 | by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards | |
551 | too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the | |
6ab3cbb5 | 552 | doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent |
8f3f2fe5 RS |
553 | special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. |
554 | ||
1c6576ab | 555 | +++ |
05ea8efd RS |
556 | ** Dired's v command now runs external viewers to view certain |
557 | types of files. The variable `dired-view-command-alist' controls | |
558 | what external viewers to use and when. | |
559 | ||
1c6576ab | 560 | +++ |
111ed14e SM |
561 | ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when |
562 | the corresponding environment variable does not exist. | |
563 | Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting | |
564 | is only rarely needed. | |
565 | ||
1c6576ab | 566 | --- |
f67cc62e | 567 | ** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. |
8ea55f33 EZ |
568 | |
569 | If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs | |
fbe51115 | 570 | idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For |
8ea55f33 EZ |
571 | example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will |
572 | only happen after 0.25s of idle time. | |
f67cc62e | 573 | |
cad113ae KG |
574 | +++ |
575 | ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If | |
576 | you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or | |
577 | C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region will now be extended | |
578 | each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, | |
579 | for example. This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you | |
580 | bind that to a key. | |
6710ea06 | 581 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 582 | +++ |
18f10eda RS |
583 | ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the |
584 | mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the | |
585 | region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might | |
586 | want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
587 | ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one |
588 | command only. | |
18f10eda | 589 | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
590 | One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode |
591 | and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. | |
592 | This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the | |
593 | mark or the region. | |
32f665fa | 594 | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
595 | After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you |
596 | deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command | |
597 | that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing | |
598 | C-g. | |
66aa61d8 | 599 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 600 | +++ |
66aa61d8 KS |
601 | ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a |
602 | previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... will cycle through the | |
603 | mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. | |
604 | ||
1c6576ab | 605 | +++ |
a474d59c RS |
606 | ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and |
607 | C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without | |
608 | switching to it. | |
7c425d82 | 609 | |
1c6576ab | 610 | +++ |
7c425d82 RS |
611 | ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to |
612 | all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only | |
613 | affects the initial frame. | |
614 | ||
efe459e4 | 615 | +++ |
fbe51115 PJ |
616 | ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. |
617 | With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; | |
564b1f76 EZ |
618 | if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding |
619 | paragraphs. | |
efe459e4 | 620 | |
3a7a0095 RS |
621 | ** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name |
622 | into the kill ring. | |
623 | ||
1c6576ab | 624 | +++ |
b04dcf45 RS |
625 | ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args |
626 | have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and | |
627 | directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a | |
628 | directory listing into a buffer. | |
629 | ||
1c6576ab | 630 | --- |
6710ea06 SM |
631 | ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window |
632 | (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. | |
633 | ||
cc563ece KS |
634 | ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse |
635 | wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided. | |
636 | This behaviour can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and | |
637 | mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables. | |
638 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 639 | +++ |
16927a56 SM |
640 | ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on |
641 | your current locale settings. If it turns out that your terminal | |
6710ea06 SM |
642 | does not support the encoding implied by your locale (for example, |
643 | it inserts non-ASCII chars if you hit M-i), you will need to add | |
16927a56 SM |
644 | |
645 | (set-keyboard-coding-system nil) | |
646 | ||
647 | to your .emacs to revert to the old behavior. | |
648 | ||
3aa2f38a RS |
649 | +++ |
650 | ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs | |
273a3930 EZ |
651 | automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save |
652 | modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It | |
653 | can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, | |
2bc8d7c8 | 654 | according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. |
3aa2f38a | 655 | |
1c6576ab | 656 | +++ |
830047fd RS |
657 | ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) |
658 | of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor | |
659 | appears in. | |
6c0b2643 | 660 | |
d5ec54b6 KS |
661 | ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any |
662 | of the recognized cursor types. | |
663 | ||
1c6576ab | 664 | +++ |
85b073d6 EZ |
665 | ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' |
666 | were changed. | |
667 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 668 | --- |
cd963ca0 GM |
669 | ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs |
670 | now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. | |
671 | ||
1c6576ab | 672 | --- |
758bf24f GM |
673 | ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that |
674 | controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will | |
675 | attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). | |
676 | ||
f5d0cc77 RS |
677 | +++ |
678 | ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. | |
679 | Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as | |
680 | `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic' now take an optional parameter MARK, | |
681 | which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating | |
682 | how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a | |
683 | single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the | |
684 | day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that | |
685 | face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, | |
686 | appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. | |
687 | ||
3f270c8a AS |
688 | ** VC Changes |
689 | ||
fc08c987 AS |
690 | *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes |
691 | the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this | |
692 | change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy | |
693 | with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you | |
694 | can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs: | |
695 | ||
696 | (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) | |
697 | ||
698 | The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. | |
699 | ||
1c6576ab | 700 | +++ |
3f270c8a AS |
701 | *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows |
702 | you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked | |
703 | by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which | |
704 | means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this | |
705 | allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for | |
706 | CVS. | |
707 | ||
eb766f96 MK |
708 | ** EDiff changes. |
709 | ||
16757dcf | 710 | +++ |
eb766f96 MK |
711 | *** When comparing directories. |
712 | Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of | |
713 | directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files | |
714 | from one directory to another. | |
715 | ||
16757dcf | 716 | +++ |
eb766f96 MK |
717 | *** When comparing files or buffers. |
718 | Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the | |
719 | currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' | |
720 | then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for | |
721 | comparison. | |
722 | ||
813f3d41 RS |
723 | ** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent |
724 | backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, | |
725 | `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. | |
726 | ||
ca8f3642 | 727 | +++ |
e94a3679 FP |
728 | ** Etags changes. |
729 | ||
73639417 FP |
730 | *** New regular expressions features |
731 | ||
732 | **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. | |
df3eebcb FP |
733 | The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained |
734 | only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is | |
735 | --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, | |
736 | where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or | |
737 | more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' | |
6861f0e3 FP |
738 | (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular |
739 | expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' | |
740 | (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to | |
741 | span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions | |
742 | and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. | |
743 | ||
2c37653c | 744 | **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc. |
6861f0e3 FP |
745 | The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, |
746 | respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, | |
747 | CR, TAB, VT, | |
748 | ||
2c37653c | 749 | **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. |
df3eebcb FP |
750 | The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags |
751 | only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is | |
752 | particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. | |
753 | ||
2c37653c | 754 | **** Regular expressions can be read from a file. |
df3eebcb FP |
755 | The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one |
756 | per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. | |
757 | ||
73639417 FP |
758 | *** New language parsing features |
759 | ||
d9256ccb FP |
760 | **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. |
761 | Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. | |
762 | ||
73639417 | 763 | **** In Perl, packages are tags. |
81d66c62 FP |
764 | Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags |
765 | as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for | |
766 | package::sub. | |
767 | ||
2c37653c FP |
768 | **** New language PHP. |
769 | Tags are functions, classes and defines. | |
f175bfff FP |
770 | If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are vars also. |
771 | ||
2c37653c FP |
772 | **** New language HTML. |
773 | Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is | |
774 | used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used. | |
775 | ||
73639417 | 776 | **** New default keywords for TeX. |
a0bbc0c5 FP |
777 | The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and |
778 | renewenvironment. | |
779 | ||
2c37653c | 780 | **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. |
dfd67a62 | 781 | If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the |
f175bfff FP |
782 | size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. |
783 | ||
784 | **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. | |
81d66c62 FP |
785 | |
786 | *** Honour #line directives. | |
787 | When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line | |
788 | directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number | |
789 | specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code | |
790 | created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it | |
791 | writes tags pointing to the source file. | |
bf8dd4e3 | 792 | |
2c37653c | 793 | *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. |
a0bbc0c5 | 794 | This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can |
5cc4f104 | 795 | be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags |
a0bbc0c5 FP |
796 | will read from standard input and mark the produced tags as belonging to |
797 | the file FILE. | |
06ee6fcd | 798 | |
c30567b7 | 799 | +++ |
406f228c PJ |
800 | ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to |
801 | --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. | |
802 | ||
1c6576ab | 803 | +++ |
7ea42709 RS |
804 | ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because |
805 | C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. | |
806 | ||
1c6576ab | 807 | +++ |
3a426197 | 808 | ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin |
1c6576ab RS |
809 | with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers |
810 | whose names begin with space are omitted. | |
c30567b7 | 811 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 812 | +++ |
3a426197 RS |
813 | ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where |
814 | filling can break lines. We provide two sample predicates, | |
815 | fill-single-word-nobreak-p and fill-french-nobreak-p. | |
8e8223e2 | 816 | |
1c6576ab | 817 | +++ |
1d57ac82 SS |
818 | ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. |
819 | When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry will always | |
820 | start a new record regardless of when the last record is. | |
821 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 822 | +++ |
2881ae98 SM |
823 | ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. |
824 | The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. | |
54c0e682 | 825 | When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, |
79014980 | 826 | i.e., there is always a closing tag. |
2881ae98 | 827 | By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis |
54c0e682 | 828 | from the file name or buffer contents. |
79014980 | 829 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 830 | +++ |
cb8d4d07 CW |
831 | ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `smgl-mode', which has XML support. |
832 | ||
1c6576ab | 833 | +++ |
aae126ea | 834 | ** New user option `isearch-resume-enabled'. |
dfd67a62 | 835 | This option can be disabled, to avoid the normal behavior of isearch |
aae126ea KS |
836 | which puts calls to `isearch-resume' in the command history. |
837 | ||
2a1e884e | 838 | --- |
3ddf952f GM |
839 | ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from |
840 | initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, | |
79014980 | 841 | instead of using default-major-mode. |
3ddf952f | 842 | |
2a1e884e | 843 | --- |
1c6576ab | 844 | ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. |
30de4b24 | 845 | |
1c6576ab RS |
846 | --- |
847 | ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. | |
30de4b24 | 848 | |
2d588beb | 849 | +++ |
1c6576ab | 850 | ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. |
2d588beb GM |
851 | Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. |
852 | Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. | |
a68c5400 | 853 | |
1c6576ab RS |
854 | --- |
855 | ** F90 mode has new navigation commands `f90-end-of-block', | |
0d9e03be | 856 | `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', `f90-previous-block'. |
e47b1d49 | 857 | |
1c6576ab RS |
858 | --- |
859 | ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' | |
2629d743 TTN |
860 | to support use of font-lock. |
861 | ||
1c6576ab | 862 | +++ |
026f408d SM |
863 | ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now |
864 | understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and | |
865 | `same-window'. | |
866 | ||
1c6576ab | 867 | +++ |
6c0b2643 GM |
868 | ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and |
869 | `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To | |
870 | include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. | |
871 | ||
30743573 | 872 | +++ |
58a11372 EZ |
873 | ** File-name completion can now ignore directories. |
874 | If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a | |
875 | slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when | |
876 | completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' | |
877 | which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion | |
878 | candidate is a directory. | |
879 | ||
1c6576ab | 880 | +++ |
af7272b1 RS |
881 | ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only |
882 | to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | |
1c6576ab RS |
883 | it remains unchanged. |
884 | ||
2a1e884e | 885 | +++ |
6c0b2643 GM |
886 | ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. |
887 | When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally | |
888 | displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. | |
889 | ||
2a1e884e | 890 | --- |
6c0b2643 GM |
891 | ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. |
892 | ||
2a1e884e | 893 | --- |
d3d268d5 JR |
894 | ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. |
895 | This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track | |
896 | the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. | |
897 | ||
2a1e884e | 898 | --- |
f58b2333 JR |
899 | ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. |
900 | See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. | |
901 | ||
2a1e884e | 902 | --- |
f85bf1bf | 903 | ** Some images are now supported on MS Windows. |
9e5aa8de | 904 | PBM and XBM images are supported, other formats which require external |
a3dde781 JR |
905 | libraries may be supported in future. |
906 | ||
f85bf1bf JR |
907 | --- |
908 | ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows. | |
909 | WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such | |
910 | as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the m ore recent versions of | |
911 | Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level | |
912 | sound support for those formats. | |
913 | ||
1c6576ab | 914 | --- |
01a7f683 JR |
915 | ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. |
916 | The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls | |
917 | whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or | |
918 | pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. | |
919 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 920 | +++ |
98659da6 KG |
921 | ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). |
922 | The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', | |
923 | and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should | |
924 | use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap | |
925 | Meta and Alt: | |
926 | (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) | |
927 | (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) | |
928 | ||
4e5cdb4f | 929 | * New modes and packages in 21.4 |
8f8da2d0 EZ |
930 | |
931 | --- | |
4e5cdb4f | 932 | ** The new ido package is an extension of the iswitchb package |
ffe5000a KS |
933 | to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition to |
934 | interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with a | |
935 | few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. | |
936 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 937 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 938 | ** The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for |
2461722b KS |
939 | cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo. |
940 | With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement | |
941 | keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active | |
942 | region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with | |
943 | cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua. | |
944 | ||
945 | In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible | |
946 | rectangle highlighting: Use S-return to start a rectangle, extend it | |
947 | using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x | |
948 | or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works). | |
949 | ||
950 | Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to | |
951 | fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or | |
952 | downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the | |
953 | rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such | |
954 | as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use | |
955 | M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the | |
956 | rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands. | |
957 | ||
958 | Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric | |
959 | prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and | |
960 | C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9. | |
961 | ||
962 | The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in | |
963 | register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text. | |
964 | ||
965 | Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space. | |
966 | When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is | |
967 | automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the | |
968 | commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands. | |
969 | ||
970 | The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for | |
971 | kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't | |
972 | want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you may customize the | |
973 | `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable. | |
974 | ||
4e5cdb4f | 975 | ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for |
7920598e KS |
976 | the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric |
977 | keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked | |
978 | +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad | |
979 | package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys. | |
980 | ||
981 | By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup', | |
982 | `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by | |
983 | using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and | |
984 | the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four | |
985 | possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and | |
986 | the NumLock toggle state (off/on). | |
987 | ||
988 | The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are: | |
989 | `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits, | |
990 | `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the | |
991 | decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization), | |
992 | `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args | |
993 | for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys' | |
994 | where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and | |
63e489f5 KS |
995 | `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.) |
996 | are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global | |
997 | or local keymaps. | |
2461722b | 998 | |
4e5cdb4f | 999 | ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to |
ffe5000a KS |
1000 | emacs' keyboard macro facilities. |
1001 | ||
e1fa392b KS |
1002 | Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this: |
1003 | F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes | |
1004 | the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value | |
ffe5000a KS |
1005 | which automatically increments every time the macro is executed. |
1006 | ||
cc801373 KS |
1007 | There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently |
1008 | defined macros. | |
1009 | ||
1010 | The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which | |
1011 | defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring, | |
1012 | C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e, | |
1013 | manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c, | |
1014 | C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el | |
1015 | for more commands. | |
1016 | ||
2c37653c | 1017 | The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to |
cc801373 | 1018 | the keyboard macro ring. |
ffe5000a | 1019 | |
f1f83e21 KS |
1020 | The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro |
1021 | before calling it, if used while defining a macro. | |
e1fa392b KS |
1022 | |
1023 | In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can | |
1024 | be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize | |
1025 | this behaviour via the variable kmacro-call-repeat-key and | |
1026 | kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg. | |
1027 | ||
f1f83e21 KS |
1028 | Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. |
1029 | C-x C-k SPC will step through the last keyboard macro one key sequence | |
1030 | at a time, prompting for the actions to take. | |
1031 | ||
66f520db | 1032 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f | 1033 | ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
66f520db EZ |
1034 | |
1035 | Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in | |
1036 | Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, | |
52901be1 EZ |
1037 | type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is |
1038 | available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. | |
66f520db | 1039 | |
10088409 | 1040 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f | 1041 | ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. |
c3d82b69 KG |
1042 | |
1043 | This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote | |
1044 | files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host, | |
1045 | Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used | |
1046 | for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for | |
1047 | the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called | |
1048 | `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell | |
1049 | connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods | |
1050 | (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or | |
1051 | `rsync' to do the copying). | |
1052 | ||
1053 | Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also | |
1054 | `su' and `sudo'. | |
1055 | ||
2a1e884e | 1056 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1057 | ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way |
49a42d13 MB |
1058 | filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so |
1059 | that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to | |
1060 | emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, | |
1061 | invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may | |
1062 | be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. | |
4e3dd7cf | 1063 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1064 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1065 | ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an |
3c0fd84c GM |
1066 | "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually |
1067 | change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' | |
1068 | settings. | |
1069 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1070 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1071 | ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you |
8a1f8073 SM |
1072 | move your cursor into hidden region of the buffer. |
1073 | It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts | |
1074 | of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... | |
1075 | ||
2a1e884e | 1076 | There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. |
adb6f9dc | 1077 | |
2a1e884e | 1078 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1079 | ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely |
81f755ae CW |
1080 | customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. |
1081 | ||
4e5cdb4f | 1082 | ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded |
813f3d41 RS |
1083 | `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting |
1084 | these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG | |
1085 | table editing available in modern word processors. The package also | |
1086 | can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such | |
1087 | as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. | |
1088 | ||
9cc1eb89 | 1089 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f KS |
1090 | ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing |
1091 | spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command | |
1092 | letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers | |
1093 | viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values. | |
1094 | ||
2a1e884e RS |
1095 | --- |
1096 | ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. | |
4e3dd7cf MB |
1097 | Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order |
1098 | to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display | |
1099 | mode-lines in inverse-video. | |
1100 | ||
a8adf791 DL |
1101 | ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems |
1102 | with Custom. | |
1103 | ||
6c0b2643 | 1104 | \f |
d278091b | 1105 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
830047fd | 1106 | |
d2d70cb6 JY |
1107 | ** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine |
1108 | whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start | |
1109 | instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function | |
1110 | testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to | |
1111 | show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to | |
1112 | a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch. | |
1113 | ||
1114 | *** Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely evaluated; | |
1115 | a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same value. The red | |
1116 | splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly complete their evaluation, | |
1117 | such as `error'. The brown splotches are skipped for forms that are expected | |
1118 | to always evaluate to the same value, such as (setq x 14). | |
1119 | ||
1120 | *** For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to help | |
1121 | out the test coverage tool. The macro 1value suppresses a brown splotch for | |
1122 | its argument. The macro noreturn suppresses a red splotch. | |
1123 | ||
9cc1eb89 | 1124 | +++ |
d2d70cb6 JY |
1125 | ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly |
1126 | do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be | |
1127 | unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc). | |
1128 | ||
3116d142 RS |
1129 | ** When you are printing using print-continuous-numbering, |
1130 | if no objects have had to be recorded in print-number-table, | |
1131 | all elements of print-number-table are nil. | |
1132 | ||
7c3cb37d RS |
1133 | ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, |
1134 | the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil. | |
1135 | ||
1136 | ** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that | |
1137 | is a copy of a given abbrev table. | |
1138 | ||
21beb82f | 1139 | +++ |
add89676 RS |
1140 | ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. |
1141 | It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they | |
21beb82f | 1142 | can start with this line: |
add89676 RS |
1143 | |
1144 | #!/usr/bin/emacs --script | |
1145 | ||
02ce3e80 SM |
1146 | ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on |
1147 | its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'". | |
1148 | ||
fc2938d1 DL |
1149 | ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access |
1150 | hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. | |
1151 | ||
3bcd2096 JPW |
1152 | ** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer |
1153 | argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to | |
1154 | the current buffer. | |
79fab26b | 1155 | |
56592beb RS |
1156 | ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn' |
1157 | and `display-warning'. | |
1158 | ||
a7bd9dc7 SM |
1159 | ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists |
1160 | of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays | |
1161 | and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now | |
1162 | exported to Lisp. | |
1163 | ||
1c6576ab RS |
1164 | ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how |
1165 | much pure storage it will approximately need. | |
1166 | ||
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1167 | ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions |
1168 | to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system | |
1169 | for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific | |
1170 | file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) | |
1171 | ||
cc305a60 RS |
1172 | ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects |
1173 | of one coding system from another coding system. | |
1174 | ||
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1175 | ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that |
1176 | are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables | |
1177 | specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating | |
1178 | such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is | |
1179 | needed. | |
1180 | ||
1181 | ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, | |
1182 | that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it | |
1183 | appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property | |
1184 | is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is | |
1185 | ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called | |
1186 | with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. | |
1187 | ||
1188 | If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for | |
1189 | confirmation as before. | |
1190 | ||
1191 | ** Controlling the left and right fringe widths. | |
1192 | ||
1193 | The left and right fringe widths can now be controlled by setting the | |
1194 | `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' frame parameters to an integer value | |
1195 | specifying the width in pixels. Setting the width to 0 effectively | |
1196 | removes the corresponding fringe. | |
1197 | ||
1198 | The actual fringe widths may deviate from the specified widths, since | |
1199 | the combined fringe widths must match an integral number of columns. | |
1200 | The extra width is distributed evenly between the left and right fringe. | |
1201 | For force a specific fringe width, specify the width as a negative | |
1202 | integer (if both widths are negative, only the left fringe gets the | |
1203 | specified width). | |
1204 | ||
1205 | Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe | |
1206 | width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any | |
1207 | of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in | |
1208 | fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. | |
1209 | ||
f2aa473a | 1210 | +++ |
2881ae98 SM |
1211 | ** Renamed file hooks to follow the convention: |
1212 | find-file-hooks to find-file-hook, | |
1213 | find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions, | |
1214 | write-file-hooks to write-file-functions, | |
1215 | write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions. | |
1216 | Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'). | |
1217 | ||
7757cdaf JPW |
1218 | ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'. |
1219 | It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old | |
1220 | name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete. | |
1221 | ||
02f20f98 KS |
1222 | ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which |
1223 | specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The | |
1224 | new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument | |
1225 | while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this | |
1226 | variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list. | |
1227 | ||
1228 | ** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by lisp code | |
1229 | to override the internal read-file-name function. | |
1230 | ||
21b6d966 KS |
1231 | ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of |
1232 | `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion | |
1233 | will only show directories. | |
1234 | ||
af7272b1 RS |
1235 | ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns |
1236 | non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using | |
1237 | its own special methods and not directly through the file system). | |
1238 | ||
1239 | ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file | |
1240 | now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs | |
1241 | (require 'cl) when loaded. | |
1242 | ||
1c6576ab | 1243 | ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the apperance of fringes. |
555c87d8 | 1244 | |
ee9e0c25 GM |
1245 | ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to |
1246 | indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The | |
1247 | syntax of defmacro has been extended to | |
1248 | ||
1249 | (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) | |
1250 | ||
1251 | DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The | |
1252 | declaration specifiers supported are: | |
1253 | ||
1254 | (indent INDENT) | |
1255 | Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. | |
1256 | ||
1257 | (edebug DEBUG) | |
1258 | Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is | |
1259 | equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. | |
1260 | ||
93607efd KS |
1261 | ** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. |
1262 | ||
1263 | This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition | |
dfd67a62 | 1264 | to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap |
93607efd KS |
1265 | binding and lookup functionality. |
1266 | ||
1267 | When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is | |
1268 | remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the | |
1269 | original command. | |
1270 | ||
1271 | Example: | |
1272 | Suppose that minor mode my-mode has defined the commands | |
1273 | my-kill-line and my-kill-word, and it wants C-k (and any other key | |
1274 | bound to kill-line) to run the command my-kill-line instead of | |
1275 | kill-line, and likewise it wants to run my-kill-word instead of | |
1276 | kill-word. | |
1277 | ||
1278 | Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map, | |
1279 | command remapping allows you to directly map kill-line into | |
1280 | my-kill-line and kill-word into my-kill-word through the minor mode | |
1281 | map using define-key: | |
1282 | ||
a8959ac2 KS |
1283 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line) |
1284 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word) | |
93607efd KS |
1285 | |
1286 | Now, when my-mode is enabled, and the user enters C-k or M-d, | |
1287 | the commands my-kill-line and my-kill-word are run. | |
1288 | ||
1289 | Notice that only one level of remapping is supported. In the above | |
1290 | example, this means that if my-kill-line is remapped to other-kill, | |
1291 | then C-k still runs my-kill-line. | |
1292 | ||
1293 | The following changes have been made to provide command remapping: | |
1294 | ||
a8959ac2 KS |
1295 | - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
1296 | `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD | |
1297 | to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to | |
1298 | another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding. | |
93607efd | 1299 | |
a8959ac2 KS |
1300 | - The new function `remap-command' returns the binding for a remapped |
1301 | command in the current keymaps, or nil if it isn't remapped. | |
93607efd KS |
1302 | |
1303 | - key-binding now remaps interactive commands unless the optional | |
a8959ac2 | 1304 | third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil. |
93607efd KS |
1305 | |
1306 | - where-is-internal now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g. | |
1307 | kill-line if my-mode is enabled), and the actual key binding for | |
1308 | the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line). | |
1309 | It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits | |
1310 | remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns C-k for kill-line and | |
1311 | <kill-line> for my-kill-line). | |
1312 | ||
1313 | - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original | |
1314 | command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the | |
1315 | command was not remapped. | |
1316 | ||
3f21fb3a KS |
1317 | ** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. |
1318 | ||
1319 | Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own | |
1320 | keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap | |
1321 | alist to this list. | |
1322 | ||
108eaabb RS |
1323 | ** Atomic change groups. |
1324 | ||
1325 | To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that | |
1326 | they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group' | |
1327 | around the code that makes changes. For instance: | |
1328 | ||
1329 | (atomic-change-group | |
1330 | (insert foo) | |
1331 | (delete-region x y)) | |
1332 | ||
1333 | If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of | |
1334 | `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that | |
1335 | were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect | |
1336 | on any other buffers--any such changes remain. | |
1337 | ||
1338 | If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the | |
1339 | lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how. | |
1340 | ||
1341 | To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'. | |
1342 | Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer. | |
1343 | This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save | |
1344 | the handle to activate the change group and then finish it. | |
1345 | ||
1346 | Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change | |
1347 | group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to | |
1348 | do this. | |
1349 | ||
1350 | After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can | |
1351 | either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call | |
1352 | `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final; | |
1353 | call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all. | |
1354 | ||
1355 | You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always | |
1356 | finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the | |
1357 | `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs. | |
1358 | (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and | |
1359 | `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the | |
1360 | group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group | |
1361 | twice. | |
1362 | ||
1363 | To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once | |
1364 | for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the | |
1365 | returned values, like this: | |
1366 | ||
1367 | (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1) | |
1368 | (prepare-change-group buffer-2)) | |
1369 | ||
1370 | You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call | |
1371 | to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to | |
1372 | `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'. | |
1373 | ||
1374 | Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you | |
1375 | would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer | |
1376 | will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first | |
1377 | change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one | |
1378 | finished. | |
1379 | ||
f17c0a19 CW |
1380 | +++ |
1381 | ** New variable char-property-alias-alist. | |
1382 | ||
1383 | This variable allows you to create alternative names for text | |
1384 | properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', | |
1385 | although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced | |
1386 | to implement the `font-lock-face' property. | |
1387 | ||
1388 | ** New special text property `font-lock-face'. | |
1389 | ||
1390 | This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by | |
1391 | M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text | |
1392 | property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the | |
1393 | new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | |
1394 | ||
d9f7eb77 RS |
1395 | ** New function remove-list-of-text-properties. |
1396 | ||
1397 | The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same | |
1398 | as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes | |
1399 | a list of property names as argument rather than a property list. | |
1400 | ||
d278091b KS |
1401 | ** New functions insert-for-yank and insert-buffer-substring-as-yank. |
1402 | ||
1403 | These functions work like `insert' and `insert-buffer-substring', but | |
1404 | removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. | |
1405 | ||
1406 | ** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties. | |
1407 | ||
11ef2a3b MB |
1408 | ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test |
1409 | whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. | |
1410 | ||
1411 | A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face | |
1412 | specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces | |
1413 | defined with defface. | |
1414 | ||
3d619ea1 MB |
1415 | ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now |
1416 | accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face | |
1417 | inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. | |
1418 | ||
1419 | ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute | |
1420 | help with handling relative face attributes. | |
1421 | ||
fd13a3cc | 1422 | ** Enhanced networking support. |
1e892206 | 1423 | |
fd13a3cc KS |
1424 | *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports |
1425 | opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as | |
1426 | create a stream or datagram server inside emacs. | |
1e892206 | 1427 | |
fd13a3cc | 1428 | - A server is started using :server t arg. |
60a501d7 | 1429 | - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg. |
fd13a3cc KS |
1430 | - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg. |
1431 | - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg. | |
1432 | - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg. | |
1e892206 | 1433 | |
60a501d7 KS |
1434 | To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this: |
1435 | (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram)) | |
1436 | ||
fd13a3cc KS |
1437 | *** Original open-network-stream is now emulated using make-network-process. |
1438 | ||
1439 | *** New function open-network-stream-nowait. | |
1440 | ||
1441 | This function initiates a non-blocking connect and returns immediately | |
1442 | before the connection is established. The filter and sentinel | |
1443 | functions can be specified as arguments to open-network-stream-nowait. | |
1444 | When the non-blocking connect completes, the sentinel is called with | |
1445 | the status matching "open" or "failed". | |
1446 | ||
1447 | *** New function open-network-stream-server. | |
4f4fada2 | 1448 | MORE INFO NEEDED HERE. |
fd13a3cc KS |
1449 | |
1450 | *** New functions process-datagram-address and set-process-datagram-address. | |
4f4fada2 | 1451 | MORE INFO NEEDED HERE. |
fd13a3cc | 1452 | |
4e5cdb4f KS |
1453 | *** New function format-network-address. |
1454 | MORE INFO NEEDED HERE. | |
1455 | ||
fd13a3cc KS |
1456 | *** By default, the function process-contact still returns (HOST SERVICE) |
1457 | for a network process. Using the new optional KEY arg, the complete list | |
1458 | of network process properties or a specific property can be selected. | |
1459 | ||
1460 | Using :local and :remote as the KEY, the address of the local or | |
1461 | remote end-point is returned. An Inet address is represented as a 5 | |
1462 | element vector, where the first 4 elements contain the IP address and | |
1463 | the fifth is the port number. | |
1464 | ||
1465 | *** Network processes can now be stopped and restarted with | |
1466 | `stop-process' and `continue-process'. For a server process, no | |
1467 | connections are accepted in the stopped state. For a client process, | |
1468 | no input is received in the stopped state. | |
1469 | ||
4e5cdb4f KS |
1470 | ** Enhancements to process support |
1471 | ||
fd13a3cc KS |
1472 | *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, |
1473 | only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set are listed. | |
1474 | ||
1475 | *** New set-process-query-on-exit-flag and process-query-on-exit-flag | |
1476 | functions. The existing process-kill-without-query function is still | |
1477 | supported, but new code should use the new functions. | |
1e892206 | 1478 | |
4e5cdb4f KS |
1479 | *** Function signal-process now accepts a process object or process |
1480 | name in addition to a process id to identify the signalled process. | |
1481 | ||
6ba3d6bc CW |
1482 | ** New function copy-tree. |
1483 | ||
9ade4a7d RS |
1484 | ** New function substring-no-properties. |
1485 | ||
3bdb7f80 KS |
1486 | ** New function minibuffer-selected-window. |
1487 | ||
4e3dd7cf MB |
1488 | ** New function `call-process-shell-command'. |
1489 | ||
f6078b98 RS |
1490 | ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu |
1491 | are now always lower case. If you specify the | |
1492 | menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' | |
1493 | as the "key" bound by that key binding. | |
1494 | ||
1495 | This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for | |
1496 | the bindings that were made with easymenu. | |
1497 | ||
1498 | ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional | |
1499 | argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks | |
1500 | for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', | |
1501 | and does not return t for keyboard macros. | |
1502 | ||
2a1e884e RS |
1503 | ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave |
1504 | buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. | |
1505 | ||
1506 | It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master | |
1507 | and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi | |
1508 | buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the | |
1509 | commands. | |
1510 | ||
1511 | This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable | |
1512 | sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the | |
1513 | SQL buffer. | |
1514 | ||
1515 | (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook | |
1516 | (function (lambda () | |
1517 | (master-mode t) | |
1518 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | |
1519 | (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook | |
1520 | (function (lambda () | |
1521 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | |
1522 | ||
596d02bc RS |
1523 | ** File local variables. |
1524 | ||
1525 | A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text | |
1526 | properties--any specified text properties are discarded. | |
1527 | ||
f5798fbd RS |
1528 | +++ |
1529 | *** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively | |
1530 | have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up, | |
1531 | and the latter now controls scrolling down. | |
1532 | ||
d33c4505 RS |
1533 | +++ |
1534 | ** New function window-body-height. | |
1535 | ||
1536 | This is like window-height but does not count the mode line | |
1537 | or the header line. | |
1538 | ||
21b6d966 KS |
1539 | ** New function format-mode-line. |
1540 | ||
1541 | This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a | |
f4d7915c | 1542 | specified) window as a string with or without text properties. |
21b6d966 | 1543 | |
9356fe5a RS |
1544 | ** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'. |
1545 | ||
1546 | These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they | |
1547 | compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'. | |
1548 | ||
4f4fada2 RS |
1549 | ** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu' |
1550 | ||
1551 | The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' most not be used (as previously | |
1552 | recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps. | |
1553 | Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets | |
1554 | you specify the map to use as an argument. | |
1555 | ||
c4f59bcf EZ |
1556 | +++ |
1557 | ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. | |
1558 | ||
1559 | When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the | |
1560 | angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is | |
1561 | equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) | |
1562 | ||
75e20bec RS |
1563 | +++ |
1564 | ** You can now make a window as short as one line. | |
1565 | ||
1566 | A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode | |
1567 | line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and | |
1568 | `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall | |
1569 | cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the | |
1570 | variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. | |
1571 | ||
e0c124ce EZ |
1572 | +++ |
1573 | ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use | |
1574 | for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a | |
1575 | number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp | |
1576 | Reference manual for more detailed documentation. | |
1577 | ||
596d02bc RS |
1578 | ** Mode line display ignores text properties in the value |
1579 | of a variable whose `risky-local-variables' property is nil. | |
1580 | ||
1c6576ab RS |
1581 | --- |
1582 | ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the | |
1583 | cl-indent package. The new user options | |
1584 | `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and | |
1585 | `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the | |
1586 | indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms. | |
1587 | ||
1588 | --- | |
1589 | ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the | |
1590 | cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. | |
1591 | ||
aaddfb29 RS |
1592 | ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: |
1593 | ||
1594 | Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes | |
1595 | from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte | |
1596 | buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them | |
1597 | now: | |
1598 | ||
1599 | 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. | |
1600 | ||
1601 | 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid | |
1602 | the time it takes to convert the format. | |
1603 | ||
1604 | 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and | |
1605 | wasteful. | |
1606 | ||
edde72f6 RS |
1607 | ** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence |
1608 | over minor mode keymaps. | |
1609 | ||
0065bb74 RS |
1610 | ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte. |
1611 | An octal escape makes it unibyte. | |
1612 | ||
bf36a6d3 MB |
1613 | ** Only one of the beginning or end of an invisible, intangible region is |
1614 | considered an acceptable value for point; which one is determined by | |
1615 | examining how the invisible/intangible properties are inherited when new | |
1616 | text is inserted adjacent to them. If text inserted at the beginning would | |
1617 | inherit the invisible/intangible properties, then that position is | |
1618 | considered unacceptable, and point is forced to the position following the | |
1619 | invisible/intangible text. If text inserted at the end would inherit the | |
1620 | properties, then the opposite happens. | |
1621 | ||
1622 | Thus, point can only go to one end of an invisible, intangible region, but | |
1623 | not the other one. This prevents C-f and C-b from appearing to stand still | |
1624 | on the screen. | |
1625 | ||
1626 | ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional | |
1627 | argument, LIMIT. | |
4e02881b | 1628 | |
ef8aee62 | 1629 | +++ |
1b8c66fe RS |
1630 | ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If |
1631 | non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that | |
1632 | it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs. | |
1633 | Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this | |
1634 | flag. | |
1635 | ||
c95eaa61 PJ |
1636 | ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. |
1637 | ||
1638 | ** The function insert-string is now obsolete. | |
1639 | ||
111ed14e SM |
1640 | ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed. |
1641 | Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches, | |
1642 | find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler | |
1643 | that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the | |
1644 | handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. | |
1645 | In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. | |
1646 | ||
cfaa4a1b | 1647 | ** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. |
59b59892 SM |
1648 | Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key |
1649 | bindings of the parent keymap. | |
cfaa4a1b | 1650 | |
f67cc62e SM |
1651 | ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. |
1652 | If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified | |
1653 | (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will | |
1654 | be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element | |
1655 | depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline | |
1656 | is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: | |
1657 | ||
1658 | s{ | |
1659 | foo | |
1660 | }{ | |
1661 | bar | |
1662 | }e | |
1663 | ||
1664 | Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of | |
1665 | text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline | |
1666 | property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) | |
1667 | refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. | |
1668 | ||
6710ea06 | 1669 | ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is |
fbe51115 | 1670 | called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'. |
6710ea06 | 1671 | |
16927a56 SM |
1672 | ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group |
1673 | (the last group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. | |
1674 | ||
1675 | ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when | |
1676 | it receives a request from emacsclient. | |
1677 | ||
8727d588 RS |
1678 | ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. |
1679 | Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more | |
1680 | than 3 levels of nesting. | |
1681 | ||
1682 | ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have | |
1683 | been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used | |
1684 | in Indented-Text mode. | |
16927a56 | 1685 | |
1c1d3d69 RS |
1686 | ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' |
1687 | property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use | |
1688 | it in that buffer. | |
1689 | ||
1690 | ** If you set `query-replace-skip-read-only' non-nil, | |
1691 | `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore | |
1692 | a match if part of it has a read-only property. | |
1693 | ||
ae4000f1 | 1694 | ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits |
1ff74324 | 1695 | properties from surrounding text. |
1c1d3d69 | 1696 | |
830047fd RS |
1697 | ** New function `buffer-local-value'. |
1698 | ||
1699 | - Function: buffer-local-value variable buffer | |
1700 | ||
1701 | This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) | |
1702 | in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in | |
1703 | buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead. | |
6c0b2643 | 1704 | |
8e8223e2 SM |
1705 | ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text |
1706 | that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one | |
1707 | clone to the other. | |
1708 | ||
1709 | ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. | |
1710 | *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list | |
d390f4aa | 1711 | of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set |
8e8223e2 SM |
1712 | other properties than `face'. |
1713 | *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra | |
1714 | properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. | |
1715 | ||
0df7a0b6 EZ |
1716 | ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' |
1717 | or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the | |
1718 | `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors. | |
1719 | ||
8e8223e2 SM |
1720 | ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' |
1721 | are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the | |
1722 | parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. | |
1723 | ||
7c3cb37d RS |
1724 | ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table. |
1725 | It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. | |
1726 | ||
a7bd9dc7 | 1727 | +++ |
8e8223e2 SM |
1728 | ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument |
1729 | to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' | |
1730 | and run any code associated with the provided feature. | |
1731 | ||
5b6a51aa GM |
1732 | ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can |
1733 | be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. | |
1734 | ||
202082d3 EZ |
1735 | +++ |
1736 | ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now | |
1737 | ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as | |
1738 | `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. | |
1739 | ||
63ca0a6e GM |
1740 | ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the |
1741 | user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' | |
1742 | accepts a float as UID parameter. | |
1743 | ||
30de4b24 SM |
1744 | ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. |
1745 | ||
30de4b24 SM |
1746 | ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. |
1747 | ||
1c6576ab RS |
1748 | ** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and |
1749 | character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form | |
1750 | of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with | |
1751 | the output of other GNU tools. | |
1752 | ||
026f408d SM |
1753 | ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'. |
1754 | ||
1755 | ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'. | |
1756 | ||
1757 | ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when | |
1758 | searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. | |
1759 | ||
cb8d4d07 | 1760 | ** Variable aliases have been implemented: |
6c0b2643 | 1761 | |
3fdb4c50 | 1762 | - Function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] |
6c0b2643 | 1763 | |
3fdb4c50 JB |
1764 | This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for |
1765 | symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
1766 | returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
1767 | changes the value of BASE-VAR. | |
6c0b2643 | 1768 | |
32ebbc3a JB |
1769 | DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has |
1770 | the same documentation as BASE-VAR. | |
1771 | ||
6c0b2643 GM |
1772 | - Function: indirect-variable VARIABLE |
1773 | ||
1774 | This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases | |
1775 | of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not | |
1776 | defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. | |
1777 | ||
1778 | It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of | |
1779 | variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. | |
1780 | ||
1781 | ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage | |
1782 | collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. | |
1783 | ||
ace64e0a GM |
1784 | ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, |
1785 | the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. | |
1786 | ||
123ac55e GM |
1787 | ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum |
1788 | have been moved from the CL package to the core. | |
1789 | ||
0b559506 JR |
1790 | ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. |
1791 | The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was | |
1792 | formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. | |
1793 | ||
6b3daede GM |
1794 | ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-keysequence and alike that |
1795 | display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer now display the prompt | |
1796 | using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. | |
1797 | ||
30de4b24 SM |
1798 | ** New packages: |
1799 | ||
1800 | *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the | |
1801 | current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). | |
1802 | ||
ffe5000a KS |
1803 | *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack |
1804 | binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp | |
1805 | data structures. | |
1806 | ||
e95768c5 | 1807 | *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. |
c494f663 CW |
1808 | This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. |
1809 | ||
4e3dd7cf MB |
1810 | *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons' |
1811 | in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets' | |
1812 | implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't | |
1813 | require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things | |
1814 | as help and apropos buffers. | |
1815 | ||
6c0b2643 | 1816 | \f |
251584f3 DL |
1817 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
1818 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
1819 | See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
1820 | fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
1821 | charsets in this release. | |
1822 | ||
f4988be7 GM |
1823 | ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
1824 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
1825 | ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
1826 | ||
1fa28578 | 1827 | ** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
163ea954 RS |
1828 | images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
1829 | to list them. | |
6344985d | 1830 | |
5ed8d5af | 1831 | ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
60dd7e0e | 1832 | support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
8628686a DL |
1833 | maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
1834 | build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
1835 | necessary changes to unexec. | |
f4988be7 | 1836 | |
efeb796b EZ |
1837 | ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
1838 | Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. | |
1839 | ||
1840 | ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs | |
1841 | Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. | |
1842 | ||
1843 | ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using | |
1844 | the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
d9c9b920 | 1845 | |
e90813b8 | 1846 | ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
a7c13351 | 1847 | all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
d69aa2e3 EZ |
1848 | lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
1849 | "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the | |
1850 | description of aspects specific to the Mac. | |
d9c9b920 | 1851 | |
efeb796b EZ |
1852 | ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
1853 | new display features described below. | |
1854 | ||
05197f40 | 1855 | \f |
1fa28578 GM |
1856 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
1857 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
1858 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
1859 | ||
1860 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
1861 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
1862 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
1863 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
1864 | the text. | |
1865 | ||
1866 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
1867 | ||
1868 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
1869 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
1870 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
1871 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
1872 | specify a font. | |
1873 | ||
1874 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
1875 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
1876 | under Lisp changes, below. | |
1877 | ||
1878 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
1879 | ||
1880 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
1881 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
1882 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
1883 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
1884 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
1885 | attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored | |
1886 | on terminals. | |
1887 | ||
1888 | The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now | |
1889 | supported on character terminals. | |
1890 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
1891 | Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of |
1892 | the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the | |
1893 | same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on | |
1894 | a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. | |
1895 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
1896 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
1897 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
1898 | ** Sound support |
1899 | ||
1900 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware | |
1901 | driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently | |
1902 | supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). | |
c8682017 EZ |
1903 | You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable |
1904 | sound support. | |
efeb796b | 1905 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
1906 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
1907 | ||
1908 | If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are | |
1909 | longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it | |
1910 | is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
1911 | minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
1912 | ||
1913 | - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
1914 | ||
1915 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
1916 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
1917 | specifies a number of lines. | |
1918 | ||
1919 | Default is 0.25. | |
1920 | ||
1921 | - User option: resize-mini-windows | |
1922 | ||
1923 | How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
1924 | resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows | |
1925 | grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk | |
1926 | again. | |
1927 | ||
1928 | Default is `grow-only'. | |
1929 | ||
1930 | ** LessTif support. | |
1931 | ||
1932 | Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see | |
a04c6760 | 1933 | <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
1934 | |
1935 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
1936 | ||
1937 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
1938 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is | |
1939 | non-nil. | |
1940 | ||
8f80abd8 EZ |
1941 | ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. |
1942 | ||
1943 | When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version | |
1944 | now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a | |
1945 | file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. | |
1946 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
1947 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. |
1948 | ||
1949 | Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for | |
1950 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when | |
1951 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
1952 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
1953 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
1954 | Emacs. | |
1955 | ||
1956 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
1957 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
1958 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
1959 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
1960 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
1961 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
1962 | ||
1963 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
1964 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
1965 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
1966 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
1967 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
1968 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
1969 | ||
1970 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
1971 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
1972 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
3593c177 | 1973 | imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
1e7db2e9 GM |
1974 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
1975 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
1976 | ** Tool bar support. |
1977 | ||
1978 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
1979 | of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level | |
1980 | changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
1981 | displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved | |
1982 | if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
1983 | icons will be used. | |
1984 | ||
1985 | To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
70fae708 | 1986 | for specific modes (with copyright assignments). |
1e7db2e9 | 1987 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
1988 | ** Tooltips. |
1989 | ||
1990 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
1991 | mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can | |
1992 | turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
1993 | ||
1994 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
1995 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
1996 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
1997 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
1998 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
1999 | ** Automatic Hscrolling |
2000 | ||
2001 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if | |
2002 | `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
2003 | customized. | |
2004 | ||
2005 | If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or | |
2006 | scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
2007 | for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
2008 | the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
2009 | to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
2010 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2011 | ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor |
2012 | of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is | |
2013 | solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option | |
ab9c49cf | 2014 | `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
1e7db2e9 | 2015 | cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
2018166d | 2016 | non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2017 | |
2018 | ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
2019 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
2020 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
2021 | customizing face `fringe'. | |
2022 | ||
2023 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. | |
2024 | You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. | |
2025 | In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D | |
2026 | appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
2027 | occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
2028 | the window to be partially obscured.) | |
2029 | ||
2030 | The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older | |
46ff99c0 MB |
2031 | versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. |
2032 | However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be | |
2033 | ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. | |
1e7db2e9 | 2034 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2035 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
2036 | ||
6b9572dc EZ |
2037 | Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
2038 | systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a | |
2039 | mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the | |
2040 | mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is | |
2041 | displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you | |
2042 | have enabled one. | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2043 | |
2044 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
2045 | ||
3aa2f38a | 2046 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. |
1e7db2e9 | 2047 | |
3aa2f38a | 2048 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2049 | |
2050 | - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or | |
2051 | `*') toggles the status. | |
2052 | ||
2053 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. | |
2054 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2055 | ** Hourglass pointer |
2056 | ||
2057 | Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
2058 | turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
2059 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2060 | ** Blinking cursor |
2061 | ||
2062 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
2063 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
2064 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
2065 | the group `cursor'. | |
2066 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2067 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
2068 | ||
2069 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
2070 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
2071 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
2072 | details. | |
2073 | ||
2074 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
2075 | have to do anything to activate it. | |
2076 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2077 | ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. |
2078 | ||
2079 | The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to | |
2080 | determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. | |
2081 | ||
2082 | On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
2083 | according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
2084 | key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
2085 | option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
2086 | delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On | |
2087 | keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two | |
2088 | keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is | |
2089 | set to nil, and these keys delete backward. | |
2090 | ||
2091 | If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
2092 | a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
2093 | Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
2094 | `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
2095 | the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only | |
2096 | terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. | |
2097 | ||
2098 | Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode | |
2099 | to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. | |
2100 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2101 | ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
2102 | changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
2103 | buffer by default. | |
2104 | ||
2105 | ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the | |
2106 | current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the | |
2107 | beginning and end of the buffer. | |
2108 | ||
2109 | ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
2110 | recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
2111 | signaled. | |
2112 | ||
2113 | ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init | |
2114 | file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. | |
2115 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2116 | ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
2117 | compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
2118 | this behavior. | |
2119 | ||
efeb796b | 2120 | The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2121 | compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let |
2122 | Emacs dump core. | |
2123 | ||
2124 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
2125 | ||
2126 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
2127 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
2128 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
2129 | ||
2130 | ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is | |
2131 | more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is | |
2132 | now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. | |
2133 | ||
2134 | ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set | |
2135 | using that menu. | |
2136 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2137 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
2138 | ||
2139 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
2140 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
2141 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
2142 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
2143 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
2144 | whitespace. | |
2145 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2146 | ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
2147 | all frames except the selected one. | |
2148 | ||
2149 | ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to | |
2150 | let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
2151 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2152 | ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs |
2153 | header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), | |
2154 | so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. | |
2155 | This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option | |
2156 | `Info-use-header-line'. | |
2157 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2158 | ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
2159 | have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', | |
2160 | `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. | |
2161 | ||
2162 | ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. | |
2163 | ||
2164 | ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is | |
2165 | `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in | |
2166 | `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
2167 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2168 | ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
2169 | displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the | |
2170 | menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode | |
2171 | menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. | |
2172 | ||
efeb796b | 2173 | ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. |
17851d9d | 2174 | |
a19e85cc | 2175 | You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' |
17851d9d EZ |
2176 | because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still |
2177 | use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your | |
2178 | `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. | |
1e7db2e9 | 2179 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2180 | ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
2181 | point in a pop-up window. | |
2182 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2183 | ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
2184 | under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or | |
2185 | customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. | |
2186 | ||
2187 | The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' | |
2188 | determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
2189 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
2190 | ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
2191 | sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
2192 | (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) | |
aa082854 | 2193 | You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
1e7db2e9 | 2194 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
2195 | ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
2196 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
2197 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
2198 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
2199 | ||
c607d53d | 2200 | ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
346598f1 | 2201 | trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
c607d53d SS |
2202 | this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
2203 | ||
4104194e | 2204 | ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
1e36ff68 DL |
2205 | be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
2206 | non-nil. | |
4104194e | 2207 | |
ba9eeda1 GM |
2208 | ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
2209 | set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
2210 | file that is already visited under a different name. | |
2211 | ||
42ac0ae5 GM |
2212 | ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
2213 | nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
2214 | ||
ba9eeda1 | 2215 | ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
eb27839a | 2216 | and displays information about that. |
b941a14b | 2217 | |
25ad1371 GM |
2218 | ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
2219 | expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
2220 | ||
2221 | This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
2222 | determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
2223 | mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
2224 | interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
2225 | regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
2226 | associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
2227 | ||
40e857ea | 2228 | ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
424d8b44 | 2229 | suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
40e857ea | 2230 | |
c08398de DL |
2231 | ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
2232 | buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
2233 | contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
2234 | by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
2235 | insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
2236 | the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
2237 | Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
2238 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2239 | ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
2240 | been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
2241 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2242 | ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
2243 | system for keyboard input. | |
2244 | ||
3d6cd763 GM |
2245 | ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
2246 | coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
2247 | escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
2248 | such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
2249 | recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
07b14857 | 2250 | always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
3d6cd763 | 2251 | read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
07b14857 KH |
2252 | (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
2253 | RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
26ae8525 | 2254 | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
2255 | ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
2256 | environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
2257 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
2258 | ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
2259 | displays all characters in that character set. | |
2260 | ||
2261 | ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
2262 | coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
2263 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2264 | ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
2265 | and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the | |
2266 | LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. | |
2267 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2268 | ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
2269 | Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
2270 | 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
2271 | GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have | |
2272 | 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
2273 | There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) | |
2274 | and Polish `slash'. | |
2275 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2276 | ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
2277 | These new environments mainly select appropriate translations | |
2278 | of the tutorial. | |
2279 | ||
2280 | ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for | |
2281 | function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
2282 | Lisp Coding Convention". | |
2283 | ||
2284 | new command old-binding | |
2285 | --- ------- ----------- | |
2286 | f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
2287 | S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
2288 | C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
2289 | ||
2290 | f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
2291 | S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
2292 | C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
2293 | ||
2294 | S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
2295 | S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
2296 | S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
2297 | S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
2298 | S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
2299 | C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
2300 | ||
bd161121 EZ |
2301 | ** There are new Leim input methods. |
2302 | New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", | |
2303 | "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim | |
2304 | package. | |
2305 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2306 | ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
2307 | rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus | |
2308 | typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating | |
2309 | "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input | |
2310 | "`", you must type "=q". | |
2311 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2312 | ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
2313 | 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display | |
2314 | more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
2315 | empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
2316 | window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
2317 | on. | |
2318 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2319 | ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
2320 | on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, | |
2321 | defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region | |
2322 | commenting with the variable `comment-style'. | |
5cb6a58e | 2323 | |
5898e075 DL |
2324 | ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
2325 | `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
2326 | indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
2327 | indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
2328 | ||
cc181e95 GM |
2329 | ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
2330 | on the display using several methods | |
2331 | ||
2332 | - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be | |
2333 | a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
2334 | be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
2335 | ||
2336 | - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is | |
5820dead | 2337 | equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
cc181e95 | 2338 | |
da4496b6 | 2339 | - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
cc181e95 GM |
2340 | |
2341 | - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
2342 | the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
2343 | ||
3b4fa1b2 | 2344 | ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
1c459486 | 2345 | an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
3b4fa1b2 | 2346 | command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
1c459486 | 2347 | does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
0daee095 | 2348 | |
176256a1 | 2349 | ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
3bbc50af DL |
2350 | `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
2351 | typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
176256a1 | 2352 | |
dd0add8e DL |
2353 | ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
2354 | characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
2355 | ||
699238d9 | 2356 | ** New X resources recognized |
100b3cbb | 2357 | |
7233c5bd GM |
2358 | *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
2359 | whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
2360 | is useful for debugging X problems. | |
2361 | ||
2362 | Example: | |
2363 | ||
699238d9 | 2364 | emacs.synchronous: true |
7233c5bd | 2365 | |
100b3cbb GM |
2366 | *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
2367 | visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
2368 | the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, | |
2369 | and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
2370 | visual class names are | |
2371 | ||
2372 | TrueColor | |
2373 | PseudoColor | |
2374 | DirectColor | |
2375 | StaticColor | |
2376 | GrayScale | |
2377 | StaticGray | |
2378 | ||
2379 | Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
2380 | `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
2381 | meaning. | |
2382 | ||
2383 | The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes | |
2384 | supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
2385 | `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
2386 | visual. | |
2387 | ||
2388 | Example: | |
2389 | ||
699238d9 | 2390 | emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
100b3cbb GM |
2391 | |
2392 | *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
2393 | specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
2394 | default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
2395 | resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
2396 | ||
2397 | Example: | |
2398 | ||
699238d9 | 2399 | emacs.privateColormap: true |
100b3cbb | 2400 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2401 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
2402 | ||
2403 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
2404 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
2405 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
2406 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
2407 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
2408 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
2409 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
2410 | ||
2411 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
2412 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
79214ddf | 2413 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
a933dad1 DL |
2414 | `default' face and vice versa. |
2415 | ||
f77a4a8a GM |
2416 | ** New face `menu'. |
2417 | ||
2418 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
f77a4a8a | 2419 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2420 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
2421 | ||
2422 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
2423 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
2424 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
2425 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
2426 | ||
2427 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
2428 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
2429 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
2430 | ||
2431 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
2432 | `ScreenGamma'. | |
2433 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2434 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. |
2435 | ||
2436 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
2437 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
2438 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
2439 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
2440 | ||
2441 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
2442 | ||
2443 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
2444 | ||
2445 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
2446 | ||
79dd1637 RS |
2447 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
2448 | LessTif/Motif one. | |
a933dad1 | 2449 | |
79dd1637 RS |
2450 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
2451 | LessTif and Motif. | |
a933dad1 | 2452 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2453 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
2454 | ||
2455 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
2456 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
2457 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
2458 | ||
2459 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
efeb796b | 2460 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). |
a933dad1 DL |
2461 | |
2462 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
2463 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
2464 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
2465 | ||
2466 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
2467 | ||
2468 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
d9e66103 | 2469 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 2470 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 2471 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
a933dad1 DL |
2472 | |
2473 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
8a33023e | 2474 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 2475 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 2476 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
a933dad1 | 2477 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2478 | ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either |
2479 | M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
2480 | M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
2481 | buffers. | |
2482 | ||
2483 | ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. | |
2484 | ||
2485 | ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows | |
2486 | abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
2487 | `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
2488 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2489 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
2490 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
2491 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
2492 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
2493 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
2494 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
2495 | ||
2496 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
2497 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2498 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
2499 | notably at the end of lines. | |
2500 | ||
2501 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
2502 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
2503 | ||
8748ecc0 | 2504 | ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
eee54b0e | 2505 | |
8748ecc0 GM |
2506 | ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
2507 | but inserts text instead of replacing it. | |
2ce72bfa | 2508 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2509 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
2510 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
2511 | after each match to get the replacement text. | |
2512 | ||
d5483ab1 GM |
2513 | ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
2514 | you edit the replacement string. | |
4ff40dd0 | 2515 | |
75823f67 EZ |
2516 | ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' |
2517 | (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases | |
2518 | in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. | |
4ff40dd0 | 2519 | |
efeb796b | 2520 | ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
889be0a1 | 2521 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2522 | ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
2523 | to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
327652be | 2524 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2525 | ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
2526 | the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and | |
2527 | MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus | |
2528 | displayed by Emacs now have help strings. | |
a32da22c | 2529 | |
75823f67 | 2530 | -- |
efeb796b EZ |
2531 | ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
2532 | read mail from the menu etc. | |
559cee90 | 2533 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2534 | ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
2535 | This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on | |
2536 | MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made | |
2537 | before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. | |
559cee90 | 2538 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2539 | ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
2540 | MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
424d8b44 | 2541 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2542 | ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version |
2543 | of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. | |
2544 | This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons | |
2545 | correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, | |
2546 | but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version | |
2547 | of Emacs. | |
eb2aac9d | 2548 | |
efeb796b | 2549 | ** Customize changes |
eb2aac9d | 2550 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2551 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
2552 | `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to | |
2553 | M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that | |
2554 | customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in | |
2555 | earlier versions of Emacs. | |
1b24b888 | 2556 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2557 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
2558 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
2559 | default). | |
79c78e77 | 2560 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2561 | *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
2562 | does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init | |
2563 | file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would | |
2564 | wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init | |
2565 | file. | |
79c78e77 | 2566 | |
7e97c157 EZ |
2567 | ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
2568 | does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to | |
2569 | avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are | |
2570 | already in your init file. | |
2571 | ||
efeb796b | 2572 | ** New features in evaluation commands |
3476b54a | 2573 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2574 | *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
2575 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
2576 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new | |
2577 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
2578 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
a933dad1 | 2579 | |
f37e8c77 EZ |
2580 | The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 |
2581 | respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most | |
2582 | the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if | |
2583 | the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is | |
2584 | printed). | |
2585 | ||
75c5350a GM |
2586 | <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated |
2587 | printed representation and an unabbreviated one. | |
f6e6cdf2 | 2588 | |
f37e8c77 EZ |
2589 | The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error |
2590 | during evaluation produces a backtrace. | |
2591 | ||
3a426197 | 2592 | *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
5e03eb84 GM |
2593 | code when called with a prefix argument. |
2594 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
2595 | ** CC mode changes. |
2596 | ||
2597 | Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
2598 | current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
2599 | incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
2600 | However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
2601 | back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
2602 | compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
2603 | release. | |
2604 | ||
e120bebf GM |
2605 | *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
2606 | CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode | |
2607 | is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much | |
2608 | confusion. | |
2609 | ||
2610 | However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the | |
2611 | default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for | |
2612 | java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't | |
2613 | notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. | |
2614 | ||
2615 | *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. | |
2616 | Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: | |
2617 | ||
2618 | space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening | |
2619 | parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". | |
2620 | ||
2621 | compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening | |
2622 | parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. | |
2623 | It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the | |
2624 | style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". | |
2625 | ||
2626 | *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. | |
2627 | Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made | |
2628 | "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an | |
2629 | earlier statement. An example: | |
2630 | ||
2631 | for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
2632 | if (a[i]) | |
2633 | res += a[i]->offset; | |
2634 | else | |
2635 | ||
2636 | Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it | |
2637 | continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after | |
2638 | the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's | |
2639 | possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of | |
2640 | the preceding "if". | |
2641 | ||
2642 | CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on | |
2643 | by default. | |
2644 | ||
2645 | *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. | |
2646 | Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which | |
2647 | meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing | |
2648 | documentation or other natural language text. | |
2649 | ||
2650 | The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that | |
2651 | contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in | |
2652 | the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline | |
2653 | strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed | |
2654 | to other strings that typically contain format specifications, | |
2655 | commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses | |
2656 | sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. | |
2657 | ||
2658 | *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. | |
2659 | Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the | |
2660 | source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in | |
2661 | comment prefixes and paragraph starts. | |
2662 | ||
2663 | *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. | |
2664 | When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment | |
2665 | line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This | |
2666 | change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in | |
2667 | Pike mode only. | |
2668 | ||
2669 | *** Better handling of syntactic errors. | |
2670 | The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been | |
2671 | improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message | |
2672 | stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the | |
2673 | following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no | |
2674 | matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while | |
2675 | indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error | |
2676 | is reported afterwards. | |
2677 | ||
2678 | *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. | |
2679 | A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by | |
2680 | returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. | |
2681 | ||
2682 | *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. | |
2683 | Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending | |
2684 | on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now | |
2685 | can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some | |
2686 | code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the | |
2687 | modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the | |
2688 | groundwork. | |
2689 | ||
7972fcfc GM |
2690 | *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
2691 | This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
2692 | of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
2693 | non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
2694 | want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
2695 | have to bother. | |
2696 | ||
2697 | Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
2698 | situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
487522fe | 2699 | and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
7972fcfc GM |
2700 | If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
2701 | the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
2702 | by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
2703 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
2704 | *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
2705 | When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
2706 | variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
2707 | take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
2708 | is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
2709 | settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
2710 | possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
2711 | Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
2712 | ||
2713 | By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
2714 | special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
2715 | the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
2716 | of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
2717 | above. | |
2718 | ||
2719 | Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
2720 | when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
2721 | function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
2722 | call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
2723 | then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
2724 | values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
2725 | only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
2726 | function documentation for more info. | |
2727 | ||
2728 | The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
2729 | especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
2730 | with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
2731 | intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
2732 | such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
2733 | is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
2734 | configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
2735 | global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
2736 | ||
2737 | (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
2738 | ||
2739 | **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
2740 | This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
2741 | ||
2742 | This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
2743 | variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
2744 | completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
2745 | the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
2746 | empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
2747 | style system. | |
2748 | ||
2749 | **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
2750 | In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
2751 | c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
2752 | as far as possible. | |
2753 | ||
2754 | *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
2755 | CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
2756 | surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
2757 | chapter about this in the manual. | |
2758 | ||
2759 | **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
2760 | The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
2761 | recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
2762 | primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
2763 | adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
2764 | ||
2765 | **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
2766 | This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
2767 | c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
2768 | ||
2769 | **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
2770 | This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
2771 | ||
2772 | It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
2773 | Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
2774 | A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
2775 | inside CC Mode. | |
2776 | ||
2777 | Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
2778 | causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
2779 | the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
2780 | available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
2781 | cc-mode/). | |
2782 | ||
9ed462b7 EZ |
2783 | **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and |
2784 | `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and | |
2785 | enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the | |
2786 | function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as | |
2787 | they were before the filling. | |
2788 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
2789 | **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. |
2790 | The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
2791 | specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
2792 | literals. | |
2793 | ||
2794 | **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
2795 | It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
2796 | prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
2797 | you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
2798 | this function. | |
2799 | ||
2800 | *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
2801 | It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
2802 | to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
2803 | struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
2804 | Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
2805 | ||
2806 | *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
2807 | It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
2808 | opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
2809 | ||
2810 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
2811 | ||
2812 | *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
2813 | See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
2814 | better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
2815 | and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
2816 | ||
2817 | *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
2818 | previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
2819 | the column specified by comment-column. | |
2820 | ||
2821 | *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
2822 | In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
2823 | is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
2824 | prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
2825 | contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
2826 | don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
2827 | ||
2828 | *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
2829 | instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
2830 | arguments. | |
2831 | ||
2832 | *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
2833 | ||
2834 | *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
2835 | c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
2836 | c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
2837 | variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
2838 | Provan). | |
2839 | ||
2840 | *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
2841 | ||
efeb796b | 2842 | ** Dired changes |
c407c570 | 2843 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2844 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
2845 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
2846 | is, delete only empty directories. | |
c407c570 | 2847 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2848 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
2849 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
2850 | copy directories recursively. | |
87be76f6 | 2851 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2852 | *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
2853 | in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with | |
2854 | the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. | |
3353ef5a | 2855 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2856 | *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
2857 | replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
2858 | directory. | |
c407c570 | 2859 | |
a320a8e7 | 2860 | *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows |
efeb796b EZ |
2861 | a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
2862 | This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so | |
2863 | will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as | |
2864 | accurate or inaccurate as it is. | |
2865 | ||
2866 | *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' | |
2867 | from ls switches. | |
2868 | ||
2869 | *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use | |
2870 | of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, | |
2871 | which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single | |
2872 | source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. | |
a933dad1 | 2873 | |
efeb796b | 2874 | ** Gnus changes. |
87be76f6 | 2875 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2876 | The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in |
2877 | four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
2878 | internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
87be76f6 | 2879 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2880 | *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the |
2881 | many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
87be76f6 | 2882 | |
efeb796b | 2883 | If you used procmail like in |
87be76f6 | 2884 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2885 | (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) |
2886 | (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
2887 | (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
2888 | (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
35384f06 | 2889 | |
efeb796b | 2890 | this now has changed to |
87be76f6 | 2891 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2892 | (setq mail-sources |
2893 | '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
2894 | :suffix ".in"))) | |
d7b511c4 | 2895 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2896 | More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> |
2897 | Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
d67f47e4 | 2898 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2899 | *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of |
2900 | Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
2901 | Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no | |
2902 | longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
d7b511c4 | 2903 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2904 | The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
2905 | use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
2906 | installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
9d453139 | 2907 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2908 | *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
2909 | parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There | |
2910 | are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
2911 | now just a compatibility layer. | |
4b9347b3 | 2912 | |
75823f67 EZ |
2913 | *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
2914 | Gnus facilities. | |
2915 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
2916 | *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be |
2917 | called to position point. | |
4b9347b3 | 2918 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2919 | *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in |
2920 | summary buffers and NOV files. | |
79214ddf | 2921 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2922 | *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number |
2923 | of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
79214ddf | 2924 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2925 | *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a |
2926 | subtly different manner. | |
aca0be23 | 2927 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2928 | *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive |
2929 | and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
2930 | ever-changing layouts. | |
79214ddf | 2931 | |
efeb796b | 2932 | *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. |
79214ddf | 2933 | |
efeb796b | 2934 | *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
8c463abe | 2935 | |
efeb796b | 2936 | ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
8c463abe | 2937 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2938 | *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
2939 | macros | |
79214ddf | 2940 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2941 | Key binding Macro |
2942 | ------------------------- | |
2943 | C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
2944 | C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
2945 | C-c C-c u @uref | |
2946 | C-c C-c q @quotation | |
2947 | C-c C-c m @email | |
2948 | C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> | |
2949 | M-RET @item | |
79214ddf | 2950 | |
efeb796b | 2951 | *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
79214ddf | 2952 | |
efeb796b | 2953 | ** Changes in Outline mode. |
79214ddf | 2954 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2955 | There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
2956 | `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to | |
2957 | the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. | |
89d57763 | 2958 | |
efeb796b | 2959 | ** Changes to Emacs Server |
79214ddf | 2960 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2961 | *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
2962 | with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers | |
2963 | are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
2964 | Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
2965 | buffers to kill, as before. | |
79214ddf | 2966 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2967 | Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, |
2968 | i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in | |
2969 | this way. | |
2970 | ||
2971 | ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options | |
2972 | of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. | |
2973 | ||
2974 | ** Changes to Show Paren mode. | |
2975 | ||
2976 | *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
2977 | The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
2978 | use. Default is 1000. | |
79214ddf | 2979 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2980 | ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
2981 | groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
f6737cde | 2982 | |
efeb796b | 2983 | ** Changes to hideshow.el |
3f6e4b8b | 2984 | |
efeb796b | 2985 | *** Generalized block selection and traversal |
f6737cde | 2986 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2987 | A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
2988 | and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
2989 | serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
2990 | See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
f6737cde | 2991 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2992 | *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, |
2993 | hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
2994 | be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
2995 | the open block. | |
f6737cde | 2996 | |
efeb796b EZ |
2997 | *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a |
2998 | function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
2999 | the normal block-hiding function. | |
f6737cde | 3000 | |
efeb796b | 3001 | *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. |
f6737cde | 3002 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3003 | *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, |
3004 | roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix | |
3005 | for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation | |
3006 | for `hs-minor-mode'. | |
f6737cde | 3007 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3008 | *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and |
3009 | hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. | |
f6737cde | 3010 | |
efeb796b | 3011 | ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
f6737cde | 3012 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3013 | *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
3014 | an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
3015 | log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. | |
0c68ce6f | 3016 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3017 | **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
3018 | current buffer. | |
d521e087 | 3019 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3020 | *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
3021 | in a log file. | |
1e7db2e9 | 3022 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3023 | *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
3024 | entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
3025 | Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's | |
3026 | version number is performed based on regular expressions from | |
3027 | `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. | |
3028 | Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. | |
3029 | ||
3030 | *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. | |
3031 | ||
3032 | ** Changes to cmuscheme | |
3033 | ||
3034 | *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed | |
3035 | `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. | |
3036 | ||
3037 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
3038 | ||
3039 | *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove | |
3040 | font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. | |
3041 | ||
3042 | *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should | |
3043 | set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. | |
3044 | ||
3045 | *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose | |
3046 | the face used for each string/comment. | |
3047 | ||
3048 | *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. | |
3049 | Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". | |
3050 | ||
3051 | ** Changes to Shell mode | |
3052 | ||
3053 | *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer | |
3054 | to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a | |
3055 | non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a | |
3056 | prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). | |
3057 | ||
3058 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
3059 | ||
3060 | These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which | |
3061 | include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. | |
3062 | ||
3063 | *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. | |
3064 | Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and | |
3065 | BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the | |
3066 | beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, | |
3067 | respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to | |
3068 | the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. | |
3069 | ||
3070 | *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' | |
3071 | to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which | |
3072 | parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the | |
3073 | user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use | |
3074 | this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, | |
3075 | respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this | |
3076 | feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option | |
3077 | `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. | |
3078 | ||
3079 | *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
3080 | and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
3081 | ||
3082 | *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
3083 | buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
3084 | buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
3085 | ||
3086 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
3087 | M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
3088 | the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
3089 | ||
3090 | *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, | |
3091 | and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, | |
3092 | see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. | |
3093 | ||
3094 | *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') | |
3095 | saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix | |
3096 | argument, it appends to the file. | |
3097 | ||
3098 | *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' | |
3099 | (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for | |
3100 | compatibility. | |
3101 | ||
3102 | *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input | |
3103 | ring (history). | |
3104 | ||
3105 | *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for | |
3106 | identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp | |
3107 | strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
3108 | ||
3109 | ** Changes to Rmail mode | |
3110 | ||
3111 | *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be | |
3112 | set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when | |
3113 | receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the | |
3114 | recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
3115 | `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
3116 | as correspondent. | |
3117 | ||
3118 | Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
3119 | mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
3120 | regexp matching your mail addresses. | |
3121 | ||
3122 | *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how | |
3123 | to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
3124 | Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
3125 | with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
3126 | for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
3127 | ||
3128 | *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, | |
3129 | like `j'. | |
3130 | ||
3131 | *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that | |
3132 | specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a | |
3133 | digest message. | |
3134 | ||
3135 | *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies | |
3136 | in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
3137 | ||
3138 | *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message | |
3139 | with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly | |
3140 | due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. | |
3141 | ||
3142 | ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify | |
3143 | an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. | |
3144 | ||
75823f67 EZ |
3145 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
3146 | use the -f option when sending mail. | |
3147 | ||
f68113db EZ |
3148 | ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the |
3149 | current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in | |
3150 | the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. | |
3151 | This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded | |
3152 | by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be | |
3153 | displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. | |
3154 | ||
3155 | If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system | |
3156 | other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable | |
3157 | `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. | |
3158 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3159 | ** Changes to TeX mode |
3160 | ||
3161 | *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
3162 | `latex-mode'. | |
3163 | ||
3164 | *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. | |
3165 | ||
3166 | *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. | |
3167 | ||
3168 | *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. | |
3169 | ||
3170 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3171 | ||
3172 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
3173 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
3174 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
3175 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
3176 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
3177 | can be edited from that buffer. | |
3178 | ||
3179 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
3180 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
3181 | `A' to use all marked entries). | |
3182 | ||
3183 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
3184 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
3185 | ||
3186 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
3187 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
3188 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
3189 | been cited. | |
3190 | ||
3191 | ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. | |
3192 | The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading | |
3193 | semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' | |
3194 | in column 1 are always made leaves. | |
3195 | ||
3196 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) | |
3197 | has the following new features: | |
3198 | ||
3199 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
3200 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
3201 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
3202 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
3203 | ||
3204 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
3205 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
3206 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
3207 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
3208 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
3209 | defaults to 1. | |
3210 | ||
3211 | ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in | |
3212 | file names. | |
3213 | ||
3214 | ** Ispell changes | |
fbc164de | 3215 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3216 | *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
3217 | transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it | |
3218 | spell-checks the current buffer. | |
59c1bf85 | 3219 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3220 | *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
3221 | added. | |
732b9cdd | 3222 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3223 | *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling |
3224 | correction is made and re-checked. | |
b8b2ea31 | 3225 | |
efeb796b | 3226 | *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
b8b2ea31 | 3227 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3228 | *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some |
3229 | cases. | |
b8b2ea31 | 3230 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3231 | *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict |
3232 | on syntax errors. | |
3233 | ||
3234 | *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
3235 | end of the buffer. | |
3236 | ||
3237 | *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
3238 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3239 | ** Makefile mode changes |
3240 | ||
3241 | *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
b8b2ea31 | 3242 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3243 | *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
3244 | Fontlock mode is active. | |
1e406be0 | 3245 | |
efeb796b | 3246 | ** Isearch changes |
e33b0397 | 3247 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3248 | *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
3249 | so that searches can be resumed. | |
e33b0397 | 3250 | |
3a426197 | 3251 | *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
efeb796b EZ |
3252 | respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
3253 | that started the search. | |
3254 | ||
3255 | *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
3256 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. | |
6f8ea2ae | 3257 | |
efeb796b | 3258 | *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
c0510d27 | 3259 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3260 | Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
3261 | `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current | |
3262 | search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
3263 | before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
3264 | highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
3265 | `secondary-selection'. | |
5d94f558 | 3266 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3267 | The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor |
3268 | will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
3269 | Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
3270 | using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
3271 | usual snappy response. | |
dc28878c | 3272 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3273 | If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for |
3274 | matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
3275 | set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
3276 | isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
95931eb1 | 3277 | |
54baed30 GM |
3278 | ** VC Changes |
3279 | ||
3280 | VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
3281 | easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
3282 | Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
3283 | to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
3284 | changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
60a441a5 | 3285 | `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
54baed30 GM |
3286 | version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
3287 | each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
3288 | file is registered in that backend. | |
3289 | ||
3290 | When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
3291 | backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
3292 | directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
3293 | master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
3294 | the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
3295 | As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
3296 | ||
3297 | The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
3298 | still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
3299 | RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
3300 | vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
3301 | where it doesn't make sense.) | |
3302 | ||
3303 | The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
3304 | obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
3305 | `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
3306 | ||
3307 | *** General Changes | |
3308 | ||
3309 | The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
3310 | checks are always done now. | |
3311 | ||
327652be | 3312 | VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
54baed30 GM |
3313 | operations. |
3314 | ||
c286608e SM |
3315 | `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
3316 | `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. | |
3317 | `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. | |
3318 | ||
22933be8 AS |
3319 | The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
3320 | first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
3321 | current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
3322 | the working file (``merge news''). | |
3323 | ||
3324 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
3325 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
3326 | downwards. | |
3327 | ||
3328 | *** Multiple Backends | |
3329 | ||
3330 | VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
3331 | useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
3332 | repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
3333 | commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
3334 | local RCS archives. | |
3335 | ||
3336 | To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
3337 | should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
3338 | backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
3339 | `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
3340 | ||
60a441a5 AS |
3341 | You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
3342 | C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as | |
3343 | a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend | |
3344 | if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the | |
3345 | current revision number from the more remote backend. | |
22933be8 AS |
3346 | |
3347 | If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
3348 | another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
3349 | any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
3350 | pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
3351 | ||
3352 | After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
3353 | changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
3354 | local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
3355 | buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
3356 | ||
54baed30 GM |
3357 | *** Changes for CVS |
3358 | ||
3359 | There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
3360 | default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
3361 | remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
3362 | by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
3363 | regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
3364 | that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
3365 | queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
3366 | ||
22933be8 AS |
3367 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
3368 | repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
3369 | revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
3370 | any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
3371 | backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
3372 | number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
3373 | (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
3374 | of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
3375 | the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
105602b1 EZ |
3376 | automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
3377 | since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file | |
3378 | name.) | |
22933be8 | 3379 | |
54baed30 GM |
3380 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
3381 | repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
3382 | If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
22933be8 | 3383 | commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
54baed30 GM |
3384 | current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
3385 | entire directory tree. | |
3386 | ||
3387 | The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
3388 | "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
3389 | is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
3390 | "watched" by other developers.) | |
3391 | ||
22933be8 AS |
3392 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
3393 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
60a441a5 | 3394 | an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
22933be8 AS |
3395 | starting at the given directory. |
3396 | ||
54baed30 GM |
3397 | *** Lisp Changes in VC |
3398 | ||
3399 | VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
3400 | add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
3401 | library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
3402 | then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
60a441a5 AS |
3403 | a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
3404 | provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top | |
54baed30 | 3405 | of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
60a441a5 AS |
3406 | you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
3407 | `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. | |
54baed30 | 3408 | |
c4ed232b | 3409 | ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
732b9cdd GM |
3410 | SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
3411 | terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
3412 | See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
3413 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3414 | ** New modes and packages |
3415 | ||
79b9f6e0 MB |
3416 | *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
3417 | automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when | |
3418 | the default is not applicable. | |
3419 | ||
b95b34e5 GM |
3420 | *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
3421 | rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
3422 | shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
3423 | ||
3424 | Features are: | |
3425 | ||
3426 | - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
3427 | drawn, like this: | \ / | |
c607d53d | 3428 | --+-- X |
b95b34e5 GM |
3429 | | / \ |
3430 | ||
3431 | - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
3432 | result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
3433 | your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
3434 | pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
3435 | then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
3436 | you are drawing. | |
3437 | ||
3438 | - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
3439 | poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
3440 | ||
3441 | - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
3442 | flood-filling. | |
3443 | ||
3444 | - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
3445 | regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
3446 | turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
3447 | artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
c607d53d | 3448 | |
b95b34e5 GM |
3449 | - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
3450 | also do without the mouse. | |
3451 | ||
3452 | - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
3453 | reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
3454 | and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
3455 | ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
3456 | the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
3457 | ||
3458 | - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
3459 | ||
3460 | lines straight-lines | |
3461 | rectangles squares | |
3462 | poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
3463 | ellipses circles | |
3464 | text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
3465 | spray-can setting size for spraying | |
3466 | vaporize line vaporize lines | |
3467 | erase characters erase rectangles | |
3468 | ||
3469 | Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
3470 | diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
3471 | the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
3472 | drawing. | |
3473 | ||
3474 | It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
3475 | (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
3476 | straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
3477 | by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
3478 | ||
3479 | - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
3480 | can be turned off). | |
3481 | ||
4473cdd9 JW |
3482 | *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
3483 | implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. | |
3484 | It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp | |
3485 | functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports | |
3486 | history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It | |
3487 | will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of | |
3488 | the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been | |
3489 | rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, | |
3490 | all within the scope of your Emacs process. | |
3491 | ||
90cbf47e GM |
3492 | *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
3493 | intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
3494 | typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
3495 | on certain projects. | |
3496 | ||
baf7eee4 GM |
3497 | *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
3498 | of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
abb2db1c | 3499 | |
d96d6bb0 | 3500 | M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
abb2db1c GM |
3501 | |
3502 | will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
3503 | face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
3504 | typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
3505 | Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
3506 | appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
3507 | current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
baf7eee4 GM |
3508 | corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
3509 | to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
abb2db1c | 3510 | |
d96d6bb0 | 3511 | *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
abb2db1c GM |
3512 | Emacs is idle. |
3513 | ||
b4c3513f EZ |
3514 | *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text |
3515 | fragments in accordance with the current major mode. | |
3516 | ||
31fc5d15 GM |
3517 | *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
3518 | parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
3519 | ||
5cb6a58e SM |
3520 | *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
3521 | package which allows different styles of comment-region and should | |
3522 | be more robust while offering the same functionality. | |
601e0081 SM |
3523 | `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
3524 | comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. | |
5cb6a58e | 3525 | |
578979ee GM |
3526 | *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
3527 | facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
3528 | separate Texinfo file. | |
3529 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
3530 | *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or |
3531 | by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
3532 | provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
3533 | `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
8a33023e | 3534 | enter check-in log messages. |
dc1178bf | 3535 | |
6abca616 EZ |
3536 | *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
3537 | without invoking external programs. | |
3538 | ||
3539 | The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
3540 | and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
3541 | `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
3542 | is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
490f2e7b | 3543 | Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
6abca616 EZ |
3544 | |
3545 | The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
3546 | page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
3547 | ||
5e5dff44 GM |
3548 | *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
3549 | authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
3550 | ||
3551 | The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
3552 | the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
3553 | the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
3554 | Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
3555 | even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
3556 | single step. | |
3557 | ||
3558 | On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
3559 | matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
3560 | probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
3561 | contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
3562 | ||
f7136ee8 GM |
3563 | *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
3564 | unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
3565 | actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
3566 | ||
bbd9b566 GM |
3567 | *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
3568 | PostScript. | |
3569 | ||
3570 | Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
3571 | ||
3572 | The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
3573 | ||
3574 | ; comment (until end of line) | |
3575 | A non-terminal | |
3576 | "C" terminal | |
3577 | ?C? special | |
3578 | $A default non-terminal | |
3579 | $"C" default terminal | |
3580 | $?C? default special | |
3581 | A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
3582 | C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
3583 | C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
3584 | A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
3585 | n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
3586 | (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
3587 | [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
3588 | C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
3589 | {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
3590 | {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
3591 | {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
3592 | C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
3593 | {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
3594 | {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
3595 | {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
3596 | ||
3597 | Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
3598 | ||
99453a38 GM |
3599 | *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
3600 | align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
3601 | determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
3602 | example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
3603 | equal signs of assignments. | |
3604 | ||
559cee90 DL |
3605 | *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
3606 | paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. | |
3607 | ||
6448a6b3 GM |
3608 | *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
3609 | list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
2018166d | 3610 | buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
6448a6b3 | 3611 | |
6344985d GM |
3612 | *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
3613 | ||
249652b1 GM |
3614 | *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
3615 | replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
3616 | is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
3617 | and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
3618 | not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
3619 | which answers different needs. | |
3620 | ||
3476b54a GM |
3621 | *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
3622 | suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside | |
3623 | expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of | |
3624 | course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with | |
3625 | reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode | |
3626 | to be enabled. | |
3627 | ||
8964fec7 SM |
3628 | *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
3629 | containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. | |
3630 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3631 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
3632 | ||
16837afc GM |
3633 | *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the |
3634 | current line in the current buffer. It also provides | |
dfd67a62 | 3635 | `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers. |
a933dad1 DL |
3636 | |
3637 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
3638 | ||
fba448c1 | 3639 | Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
8901d1ac GM |
3640 | `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
3641 | disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
3642 | `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
3643 | displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
3644 | and background colors. | |
3645 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3646 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
3647 | Pascal) language. | |
3648 | ||
3649 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
3650 | the text at point. | |
3651 | ||
3652 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
3653 | ||
8d54eb69 DL |
3654 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
3655 | ||
732b9cdd GM |
3656 | *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
3657 | whitespace in a file. | |
a933dad1 | 3658 | |
ebcfda83 GM |
3659 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
3660 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
3661 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
3662 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
3663 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
3664 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
3665 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
3666 | ||
3667 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
3668 | ||
3669 | Here is an example of columns: | |
3670 | ||
3671 | horse apple bus | |
3672 | dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
3673 | porcupine strawberry airplane | |
3674 | ||
3675 | Doing the following settings: | |
3676 | ||
3677 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
3678 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
3679 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
3680 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
3681 | ||
3682 | ||
3683 | Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
3684 | ||
3685 | M-x delimit-columns-region | |
3686 | ||
3687 | It results: | |
3688 | ||
3689 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
3690 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
3691 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
3692 | ||
3693 | delim-col has the following options: | |
3694 | ||
3695 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
3696 | before all columns. | |
3697 | ||
3698 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
3699 | between each column. | |
3700 | ||
3701 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
3702 | after all columns. | |
3703 | ||
3704 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
3705 | each column. | |
3706 | ||
3707 | delim-col has the following commands: | |
3708 | ||
3709 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
3710 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
3711 | ||
2018166d DL |
3712 | *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
3713 | operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a | |
3714 | menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the | |
3715 | recent file list can be displayed: | |
f507826c | 3716 | |
31fc5d15 | 3717 | - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
8a33023e GM |
3718 | - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
3719 | - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
f507826c | 3720 | |
31fc5d15 GM |
3721 | The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
3722 | dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
f507826c | 3723 | |
8062f458 DL |
3724 | *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
3725 | text. | |
3726 | ||
36e24b82 | 3727 | *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
91735437 DL |
3728 | of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
3729 | specific to Message mode. | |
3730 | ||
36e24b82 DL |
3731 | *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
3732 | viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
3733 | with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
3734 | ||
aaa659ef DL |
3735 | *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
3736 | interface to access directory servers using different directory | |
3737 | protocols. It has a separate manual. | |
3738 | ||
eee54b0e DL |
3739 | *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
3740 | for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
3741 | ||
612839b6 GM |
3742 | *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
3743 | ||
5d94f558 | 3744 | *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
612839b6 | 3745 | minibuffer with completion. |
aaa659ef | 3746 | |
399da7e3 DL |
3747 | *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
3748 | with the diary features. | |
3749 | ||
6e417ca5 DL |
3750 | *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
3751 | numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
3752 | ||
4a27bdfb GM |
3753 | *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
3754 | Fill mode. | |
3755 | ||
dace60cf JW |
3756 | *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
3757 | facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
3758 | difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
3759 | they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
a18a342d | 3760 | |
9540ec3f EZ |
3761 | *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. |
3762 | It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension | |
3763 | `.g'. | |
3764 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3765 | ** Changes in sort.el |
3766 | ||
3767 | The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' | |
3768 | as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The | |
3769 | new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default | |
3770 | numeric base. | |
3771 | ||
3772 | ** Changes to Ange-ftp | |
3773 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3774 | *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
3775 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
3776 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
3777 | ||
3778 | *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive | |
3779 | ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
3780 | ||
3781 | *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which | |
3782 | output ^M at the end of lines. | |
3783 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3784 | ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor |
3785 | mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
3786 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3787 | ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
3788 | If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
3789 | `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
3790 | ||
3791 | ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom | |
3792 | group. | |
3793 | ||
3794 | ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the | |
3795 | behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values | |
3796 | are recognized: | |
3797 | ||
3798 | `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; | |
3799 | `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; | |
3800 | `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; | |
3801 | nil -- just delete one character. | |
3802 | ||
3803 | Default value is `untabify'. | |
3804 | ||
3805 | [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] | |
3806 | ||
3807 | ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face | |
3808 | symbol, not double-quoted. | |
3809 | ||
3810 | ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future | |
3811 | version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, | |
3812 | profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been | |
3813 | moved to lisp/obsolete. | |
3814 | ||
3815 | ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. | |
3816 | To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the | |
3817 | `auto-compression-mode' command. | |
3818 | ||
3819 | ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for | |
3820 | `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and | |
3821 | `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. | |
3822 | ||
3823 | ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to | |
3824 | `browse-url-new-window-flag'. | |
3825 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3826 | ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
3827 | operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
3828 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3829 | ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
3830 | is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
3831 | ||
3832 | ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM | |
3833 | support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, | |
3834 | use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
3835 | buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
3836 | M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
3837 | new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
3838 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3839 | ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
3840 | a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
3841 | ||
3842 | ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. | |
3843 | ||
3844 | The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the | |
3845 | file you are visiting in Hexl mode. | |
3846 | ||
3847 | ** Shell script mode changes. | |
3848 | ||
3849 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
3850 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and | |
3851 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
3852 | ||
3853 | ** Etags changes. | |
3854 | ||
3855 | *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
3856 | ||
3857 | *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now | |
3858 | possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with | |
3859 | {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. | |
3860 | This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains | |
3861 | a regular expression. The manual contains details. | |
3862 | ||
3863 | *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function | |
3864 | declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
3865 | ||
3866 | *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
3867 | "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. | |
3868 | ||
3869 | *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags | |
3870 | automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or | |
3871 | `template' keywords. | |
3872 | ||
3873 | *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in | |
3874 | C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. | |
3875 | ||
3876 | *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
3877 | types. | |
3878 | ||
3879 | *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. | |
3880 | ||
3881 | *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
3882 | ||
3883 | *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
3884 | are now tagged. | |
3885 | ||
3886 | *** In makefiles, tags the targets. | |
3887 | ||
3888 | *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
3889 | variables are tagged. | |
3890 | ||
3891 | *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
3892 | ||
3893 | *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is | |
3894 | for PSWrap. | |
3895 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3896 | ** Changes in etags.el |
3897 | ||
3898 | *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make | |
3899 | tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
3900 | is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
3901 | ||
3902 | *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting | |
3903 | the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. | |
3904 | ||
3905 | If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE | |
3906 | FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes | |
3907 | TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, | |
3908 | obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. | |
3909 | ||
3910 | TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. | |
3911 | ||
3912 | FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags | |
3913 | List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. | |
3914 | ||
3915 | A useful example value for this variable might be something like: | |
3916 | ||
3917 | '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) | |
3918 | ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) | |
3919 | ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) | |
3920 | ||
3921 | *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance | |
3922 | of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. | |
3923 | ||
3924 | *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the | |
3925 | names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. | |
3926 | ||
3927 | *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. | |
3928 | If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
3929 | /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
3930 | "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, | |
3931 | point will go to the beginning of the file. | |
3932 | ||
3933 | *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if | |
3934 | auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search | |
3935 | (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. | |
3936 | ||
3937 | *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point | |
3938 | in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is | |
3939 | found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. | |
3940 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3941 | ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
3942 | remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
3943 | appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
3944 | ||
3945 | ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
3946 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3947 | ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
3948 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3949 | ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
3950 | containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular | |
3951 | expression from that list, are not checked. | |
3952 | ||
3953 | ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. | |
3954 | When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, | |
3955 | and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert | |
3956 | the buffer, just like for the local files. | |
3957 | ||
3958 | ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. | |
3959 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3960 | ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
3961 | displays local abbrevs, only. | |
3962 | ||
965bc065 DL |
3963 | ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping |
3964 | paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
3965 | ||
4e8864c7 GM |
3966 | ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse |
3967 | may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value | |
3968 | is measured in pixels. | |
3969 | ||
965bc065 DL |
3970 | ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files |
3971 | to be visited as images. | |
3972 | ||
68d0efa6 GM |
3973 | ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' |
3974 | were added to compile.el. | |
3975 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3976 | ** Withdrawn packages |
3977 | ||
3978 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
3979 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
25a81338 | 3980 | |
3261c1d8 DL |
3981 | *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
3982 | ||
3983 | *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
ce75fd23 | 3984 | |
05197f40 | 3985 | \f |
01242779 DL |
3986 | * Incompatible Lisp changes |
3987 | ||
3988 | There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
3989 | may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
3b6936cc | 3990 | See the sections below for details. |
01242779 | 3991 | |
89d57763 | 3992 | ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
9b2a085d | 3993 | `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
bd1190d7 RS |
3994 | Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' |
3995 | to remove the properties of the copy. | |
01242779 DL |
3996 | |
3997 | ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
3998 | which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
3999 | may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
4000 | these properties are active. | |
4001 | ||
4dd4cc14 | 4002 | ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
01242779 | 4003 | ranges may affect some code. |
1c14ba45 DL |
4004 | |
4005 | ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
4006 | buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
4007 | make a difference to some code. | |
4008 | ||
4dd4cc14 DL |
4009 | ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
4010 | operates on the minibuffer. | |
4011 | ||
7c94ccf6 EZ |
4012 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
4013 | cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce | |
4014 | different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters | |
4015 | (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). | |
4016 | Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate | |
4017 | character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading | |
4018 | multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE | |
4019 | encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program | |
4020 | reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte | |
4021 | sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as | |
4022 | a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in | |
4023 | the buffer as multibyte characters. | |
4024 | ||
4025 | Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal | |
4026 | MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only | |
4027 | appropriate for reading truly binary files. | |
4028 | ||
7a39158f | 4029 | ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
3280fbe8 EZ |
4030 | `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
4031 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. | |
7a39158f DL |
4032 | |
4033 | ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
539e74f9 EZ |
4034 | long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat', |
4035 | such as `mapconcat'. | |
7a39158f | 4036 | |
55bb62fd EZ |
4037 | ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte |
4038 | string. | |
4039 | ||
f34eb373 DL |
4040 | ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
4041 | extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
4042 | dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
4043 | one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
4044 | charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
4045 | the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
028d739a DL |
4046 | encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
4047 | probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
3478eafc | 4048 | |
98384b7b EZ |
4049 | ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
4050 | Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be | |
4051 | aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should | |
4052 | not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and | |
4053 | on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the | |
4054 | behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It | |
4055 | turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to | |
4056 | remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well | |
4057 | advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value | |
4058 | will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. | |
7cd5f1e7 | 4059 | |
05197f40 | 4060 | \f |
ce75fd23 GM |
4061 | * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
4062 | (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
4063 | ||
e3b22517 GM |
4064 | ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. |
4065 | ||
1ff74324 | 4066 | ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el |
9e5a7f2a GM |
4067 | allows the animated display of strings. |
4068 | ||
ed31fabf GM |
4069 | ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
4070 | interactive form of a function. | |
4071 | ||
2018166d DL |
4072 | ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
4073 | between custom options. Example: | |
4074 | ||
4075 | (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
4076 | "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
4077 | This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
4078 | `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
4079 | :group 'mule | |
4080 | :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
4081 | :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
4082 | ||
4083 | This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
4084 | current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
4085 | first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
4086 | ||
f3780fe4 | 4087 | ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
a758f97d GM |
4088 | function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
4089 | args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
4090 | (signal or normal termination). | |
4091 | ||
023045d6 DL |
4092 | ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
4093 | from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
4094 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
4095 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
4096 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
4097 | ||
52d89894 GM |
4098 | ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
4099 | alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
4100 | ||
693c4692 | 4101 | ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
4301cf66 | 4102 | |
6bc92b2e GM |
4103 | ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
4104 | deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
4105 | being deleted. | |
4106 | ||
39e776cd SM |
4107 | ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
4108 | ||
1396138a | 4109 | ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
a18a342d DL |
4110 | If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
4111 | skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
4112 | with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
4113 | C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
4114 | charset. | |
4115 | ||
4fbdfdcf MB |
4116 | ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
4117 | the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the | |
4118 | message. | |
4119 | ||
6a0b0752 MB |
4120 | ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
4121 | expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. | |
4122 | ||
47e351a3 GM |
4123 | ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
4124 | with the more general `:mask' property. | |
4125 | ||
f864120f | 4126 | ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
ba9eeda1 | 4127 | |
a2bd77b8 GM |
4128 | ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
4129 | backslash. | |
4130 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
4131 | ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
4132 | is running in batch mode. For example, | |
4133 | ||
4134 | (message "%s" (read t)) | |
4135 | ||
4136 | will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
4137 | to standard output. | |
4138 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
4139 | ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', |
4140 | `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
4141 | ||
ead53494 GM |
4142 | ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
4143 | will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
4144 | frame or window. | |
4145 | ||
27848c01 GM |
4146 | ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
4147 | were added | |
4148 | ||
4149 | - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
4150 | ||
8a33023e | 4151 | Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
27848c01 GM |
4152 | a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
4153 | ||
4154 | - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
4155 | ||
8a33023e | 4156 | Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
27848c01 GM |
4157 | comparison is done with `eq'. |
4158 | ||
4159 | ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. | |
3ab82477 | 4160 | |
b548072f | 4161 | ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
c8682017 | 4162 | has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and |
ee39b988 | 4163 | `key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. |
b548072f | 4164 | |
07b14857 KH |
4165 | ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
4166 | without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
4167 | convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
4168 | ||
9662da0b GM |
4169 | ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
4170 | or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
d5aa31d8 | 4171 | |
7fce7efb DL |
4172 | ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
4173 | function was declared obsolete. | |
4174 | ||
5d94f558 | 4175 | ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
7fce7efb DL |
4176 | retained as an alias). |
4177 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
4178 | ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
4179 | It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result | |
4180 | is automatically converted to Emacs' form. | |
4181 | ||
87efd256 GM |
4182 | ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
4183 | ||
39b39373 GM |
4184 | - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
4185 | ||
4186 | Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
4187 | omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
4188 | the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
4189 | even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
4190 | minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
4191 | means never include the minibuffer window. | |
87efd256 | 4192 | |
a56ebb90 | 4193 | ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows |
67c9a1d2 | 4194 | |
a56ebb90 | 4195 | - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT |
67c9a1d2 GM |
4196 | |
4197 | Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
4198 | ||
4199 | This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
4200 | calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
4201 | argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
4202 | value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
4203 | returned. | |
4204 | ||
4205 | Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
4206 | if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
4207 | it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
4208 | minibuffer even if it is active. | |
4209 | ||
4210 | Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
4211 | counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
4212 | too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
4213 | and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
4214 | `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
4215 | entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
4216 | ||
4217 | ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
4218 | ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
4219 | ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
4220 | ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
4221 | ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
4222 | If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
4223 | Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
4224 | ||
ead53494 GM |
4225 | ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
4226 | event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
4227 | argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
dce6b995 | 4228 | |
25fa6deb GM |
4229 | ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
4230 | call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
088831a6 GM |
4231 | message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
4232 | Default value is nil. | |
25fa6deb | 4233 | |
5d94f558 | 4234 | ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
1681ead6 GM |
4235 | meaning no limit. |
4236 | ||
5b034b7f EZ |
4237 | ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls |
4238 | the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line | |
4239 | numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. | |
4240 | ||
5d94f558 | 4241 | ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
c08398de DL |
4242 | coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
4243 | DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
4244 | ||
9b2999d0 DL |
4245 | ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument |
4246 | list of a primitive. | |
de370c4c | 4247 | |
c286608e SM |
4248 | ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
4249 | ||
80c05bd3 DL |
4250 | ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
4251 | buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
4252 | This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
4253 | than replacing the local map. | |
4254 | ||
14fd0da3 DL |
4255 | ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
4256 | `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
4257 | removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
4258 | instead. | |
45f485a6 GM |
4259 | |
4260 | ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
4261 | ||
c286608e SM |
4262 | ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
4263 | as promised long ago. | |
f0298744 | 4264 | |
5d94f558 | 4265 | ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
ac57988b GM |
4266 | |
4267 | ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems | |
4268 | for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but | |
4269 | patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. | |
4270 | ||
05197f40 | 4271 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
4272 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
4273 | ||
6260538e GM |
4274 | ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for |
4275 | regular expressions. | |
4276 | ||
4277 | - Function: rx-to-string SEXP | |
4278 | ||
4279 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
4280 | ||
4281 | - Macro: rx SEXP | |
4282 | ||
4283 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
4284 | ||
4285 | The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp | |
4286 | notation. | |
4287 | ||
4288 | STRING | |
4289 | matches string STRING literally. | |
4290 | ||
4291 | CHAR | |
4292 | matches character CHAR literally. | |
4293 | ||
4294 | `not-newline' | |
4295 | matches any character except a newline. | |
4296 | . | |
4297 | `anything' | |
4298 | matches any character | |
4299 | ||
4300 | `(any SET)' | |
4301 | matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. | |
4302 | Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. | |
4303 | ||
79014980 | 4304 | '(in SET)' |
6260538e GM |
4305 | like `any'. |
4306 | ||
4307 | `(not (any SET))' | |
4308 | matches any character not in SET | |
4309 | ||
4310 | `line-start' | |
4311 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line | |
4312 | in the text being matched | |
4313 | ||
4314 | `line-end' | |
4315 | is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line | |
4316 | ||
4317 | `string-start' | |
4318 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
4319 | string being matched against. | |
4320 | ||
4321 | `string-end' | |
4322 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
4323 | string being matched against. | |
4324 | ||
4325 | `buffer-start' | |
4326 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
4327 | buffer being matched against. | |
4328 | ||
4329 | `buffer-end' | |
4330 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
4331 | buffer being matched against. | |
4332 | ||
4333 | `point' | |
4334 | matches the empty string, but only at point. | |
4335 | ||
4336 | `word-start' | |
4337 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
4338 | word. | |
4339 | ||
4340 | `word-end' | |
4341 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. | |
4342 | ||
4343 | `word-boundary' | |
4344 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
4345 | word. | |
4346 | ||
4347 | `(not word-boundary)' | |
4348 | matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a | |
4349 | word. | |
4350 | ||
4351 | `digit' | |
4352 | matches 0 through 9. | |
4353 | ||
4354 | `control' | |
4355 | matches ASCII control characters. | |
4356 | ||
4357 | `hex-digit' | |
4358 | matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
4359 | ||
4360 | `blank' | |
4361 | matches space and tab only. | |
4362 | ||
4363 | `graphic' | |
4364 | matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
4365 | space, and DEL. | |
4366 | ||
4367 | `printing' | |
4368 | matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
4369 | and DEL. | |
4370 | ||
4371 | `alphanumeric' | |
4372 | matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4373 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
4374 | ||
4375 | `letter' | |
4376 | matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4377 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
4378 | ||
4379 | `ascii' | |
4380 | matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
4381 | ||
4382 | `nonascii' | |
4383 | matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
4384 | ||
4385 | `lower' | |
4386 | matches anything lower-case. | |
4387 | ||
4388 | `upper' | |
4389 | matches anything upper-case. | |
4390 | ||
4391 | `punctuation' | |
4392 | matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4393 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
4394 | ||
4395 | `space' | |
4396 | matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
4397 | ||
4398 | `word' | |
4399 | matches anything that has word syntax. | |
4400 | ||
4401 | `(syntax SYNTAX)' | |
4402 | matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one | |
4403 | of the following symbols. | |
4404 | ||
4405 | `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) | |
4406 | `punctuation' (\\s.) | |
4407 | `word' (\\sw) | |
4408 | `symbol' (\\s_) | |
4409 | `open-parenthesis' (\\s() | |
4410 | `close-parenthesis' (\\s)) | |
4411 | `expression-prefix' (\\s') | |
4412 | `string-quote' (\\s\") | |
4413 | `paired-delimiter' (\\s$) | |
4414 | `escape' (\\s\\) | |
4415 | `character-quote' (\\s/) | |
4416 | `comment-start' (\\s<) | |
4417 | `comment-end' (\\s>) | |
4418 | ||
4419 | `(not (syntax SYNTAX))' | |
4420 | matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. | |
4421 | ||
4422 | `(category CATEGORY)' | |
4423 | matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be | |
4424 | either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. | |
4425 | ||
4426 | `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) | |
4427 | `base-vowel' (\\c1) | |
4428 | `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) | |
4429 | `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) | |
4430 | `tone-mark' (\\c4) | |
4431 | `symbol' (\\c5) | |
4432 | `digit' (\\c6) | |
4433 | `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) | |
4434 | `vowel-sign' (\\c8) | |
4435 | `semivowel-lower' (\\c9) | |
4436 | `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) | |
4437 | `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) | |
4438 | `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) | |
4439 | `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) | |
4440 | `greek-two-byte' (\\cG) | |
4441 | `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) | |
4442 | `indian-tow-byte' (\\cI) | |
4443 | `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) | |
4444 | `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) | |
4445 | `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) | |
4446 | `ascii' (\\ca) | |
4447 | `arabic' (\\cb) | |
4448 | `chinese' (\\cc) | |
4449 | `ethiopic' (\\ce) | |
4450 | `greek' (\\cg) | |
4451 | `korean' (\\ch) | |
4452 | `indian' (\\ci) | |
4453 | `japanese' (\\cj) | |
4454 | `japanese-katakana' (\\ck) | |
4455 | `latin' (\\cl) | |
4456 | `lao' (\\co) | |
4457 | `tibetan' (\\cq) | |
4458 | `japanese-roman' (\\cr) | |
4459 | `thai' (\\ct) | |
4460 | `vietnamese' (\\cv) | |
4461 | `hebrew' (\\cw) | |
4462 | `cyrillic' (\\cy) | |
4463 | `can-break' (\\c|) | |
4464 | ||
4465 | `(not (category CATEGORY))' | |
4466 | matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. | |
4467 | ||
4468 | `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
4469 | matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. | |
4470 | ||
4471 | `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
4472 | like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', | |
4473 | `match-beginning', and `match-string'. | |
4474 | ||
4475 | `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
4476 | another name for `submatch'. | |
4477 | ||
4478 | `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
4479 | matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all | |
4480 | args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting | |
4481 | regular expression. | |
4482 | ||
4483 | `(minimal-match SEXP)' | |
4484 | produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching | |
e0e7f2d5 | 4485 | zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they |
6260538e GM |
4486 | match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can |
4487 | still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. | |
4488 | ||
4489 | `(maximal-match SEXP)' | |
c3518b63 | 4490 | produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. |
6260538e GM |
4491 | |
4492 | `(zero-or-more SEXP)' | |
4493 | matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
4494 | ||
4495 | `(0+ SEXP)' | |
4496 | like `zero-or-more'. | |
4497 | ||
4498 | `(* SEXP)' | |
4499 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
4500 | ||
4501 | `(*? SEXP)' | |
4502 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
4503 | ||
4504 | `(one-or-more SEXP)' | |
4505 | matches one or more occurrences of A. | |
79014980 | 4506 | |
6260538e GM |
4507 | `(1+ SEXP)' |
4508 | like `one-or-more'. | |
4509 | ||
4510 | `(+ SEXP)' | |
4511 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
4512 | ||
4513 | `(+? SEXP)' | |
4514 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
4515 | ||
4516 | `(zero-or-one SEXP)' | |
4517 | matches zero or one occurrences of A. | |
79014980 | 4518 | |
6260538e GM |
4519 | `(optional SEXP)' |
4520 | like `zero-or-one'. | |
4521 | ||
4522 | `(? SEXP)' | |
4523 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
4524 | ||
4525 | `(?? SEXP)' | |
4526 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
4527 | ||
4528 | `(repeat N SEXP)' | |
4529 | matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
4530 | ||
4531 | `(repeat N M SEXP)' | |
4532 | matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
4533 | ||
4534 | `(eval FORM)' | |
c3518b63 | 4535 | evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, |
6260538e GM |
4536 | `regexp-quote' it. |
4537 | ||
4538 | `(regexp REGEXP)' | |
4539 | include REGEXP in string notation in the result. | |
4540 | ||
697617d9 GM |
4541 | *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
4542 | ||
85c75536 MB |
4543 | *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
4544 | buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside | |
4545 | the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved | |
4546 | restriction to be restored incorrectly. | |
4547 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
4548 | *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
4549 | `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
028d739a | 4550 | when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
0b8a3a6d DL |
4551 | multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
4552 | ||
fb2c6a6b | 4553 | *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and |
58008c36 EZ |
4554 | `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string |
4555 | if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
4556 | |
4557 | *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
4558 | changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
4559 | [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
4560 | regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
4561 | the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
4562 | extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
4563 | bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
4564 | eight-bit-graphic. | |
4565 | ||
4566 | ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
4567 | ||
9b2a085d | 4568 | A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
0b8a3a6d DL |
4569 | a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
4570 | character set as previously. | |
4571 | ||
4572 | *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
4573 | They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
4574 | modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
4575 | ||
4576 | CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
4577 | characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
4578 | range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
4579 | case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
4580 | ||
4581 | FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
9b2a085d | 4582 | name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
0b8a3a6d DL |
4583 | |
4584 | *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
4585 | registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
4586 | "fontset-default". | |
4587 | ||
4588 | *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
4589 | argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
4590 | ||
4591 | ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
4592 | composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
4593 | buffers and strings. | |
4594 | ||
4595 | *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
4596 | character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
4597 | code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
4598 | have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
4599 | composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
4600 | composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
4601 | The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
4602 | also been deleted. | |
4603 | ||
4604 | *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
4605 | specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
4606 | `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
4607 | ||
4608 | *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
4609 | MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
4610 | composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
4611 | may differ between buffer and string text. | |
4612 | ||
4613 | *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
4614 | COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
4615 | ||
4616 | *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
4617 | directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
4618 | Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
4619 | `composition' from STRING. | |
4620 | ||
4621 | *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
4622 | a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
4623 | ||
4624 | *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
4625 | obsolete. | |
4626 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
4627 | ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
4628 | the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
4629 | ||
965bc065 | 4630 | ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
1e36ff68 DL |
4631 | `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
4632 | introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
4633 | U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
0b8a3a6d | 4634 | |
3d7a4ec8 EZ |
4635 | Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so |
4636 | characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, | |
4637 | etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are | |
4638 | different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text | |
4639 | which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be | |
4640 | encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. | |
4641 | ||
4642 | ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. | |
4643 | It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For | |
4644 | details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
23cfab61 | 4645 | |
0b8a3a6d | 4646 | ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
1e36ff68 DL |
4647 | `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
4648 | standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
4649 | ||
4650 | ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
4651 | have been introduced. | |
0b8a3a6d | 4652 | |
0b8a3a6d | 4653 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
1e36ff68 | 4654 | have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
028d739a DL |
4655 | 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
4656 | eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
4657 | emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
2018166d DL |
4658 | buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
4659 | eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string | |
4660 | must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to | |
4661 | their multibyte equivalent. | |
0b8a3a6d | 4662 | |
f0124b4a DL |
4663 | ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
4664 | that offset in the file before writing. | |
4665 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
4666 | ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
4667 | compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). | |
7464346d | 4668 | |
612839b6 GM |
4669 | ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
4670 | `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
4671 | from which the command was issued. | |
4672 | ||
4673 | ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
4674 | `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
4675 | `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
4676 | additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
4677 | operate on. | |
4678 | ||
271b4185 GM |
4679 | ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
4680 | to `window-buffer-height'. | |
4681 | ||
4682 | - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
4683 | ||
4684 | Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
4685 | The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
4686 | lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
4687 | ||
4688 | Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
4689 | respectively. | |
4690 | ||
8a33023e | 4691 | If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
271b4185 GM |
4692 | COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
4693 | ||
4694 | The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
4695 | obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
4696 | on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
4697 | ||
4698 | Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
4699 | buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
4700 | possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
4701 | is currently displayed in some window. | |
4702 | ||
3c30cb6e DL |
4703 | ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
4704 | argument function's results. | |
4705 | ||
62f20204 | 4706 | ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
55bb62fd | 4707 | signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, |
c8682017 EZ |
4708 | `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs |
4709 | 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte | |
55bb62fd | 4710 | sequence). |
62f20204 | 4711 | |
c0510d27 | 4712 | ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
b4da8dfa | 4713 | header in the list of headers passed to it. |
c0510d27 GM |
4714 | |
4715 | ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
4716 | ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
4717 | ||
4718 | ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
19d1bc27 GM |
4719 | cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
4720 | as follows: | |
4721 | ||
4722 | t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
4723 | nil don't display a cursor | |
4724 | `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
4725 | (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
4726 | others display a box cursor. | |
4727 | ||
9a0dd3dc GM |
4728 | ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
4729 | an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
4730 | defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
4731 | set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
4732 | ||
d7b511c4 | 4733 | ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
dc1178bf | 4734 | specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
d7b511c4 GM |
4735 | the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
4736 | text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
4737 | ||
4738 | Example: | |
4739 | ||
4740 | (string-to-syntax "()") | |
4741 | => (4 . 41) | |
4742 | ||
1fa28578 GM |
4743 | ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
4744 | other than 10. | |
4745 | ||
4746 | *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
4747 | INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
4748 | ||
5d94f558 | 4749 | #b1111 |
1fa28578 | 4750 | => 15 |
5d94f558 | 4751 | #b-1111 |
1fa28578 GM |
4752 | => -15 |
4753 | ||
4754 | *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
4755 | ||
5d94f558 | 4756 | #o666 |
1fa28578 GM |
4757 | => 438 |
4758 | ||
4759 | *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
4760 | ||
5d94f558 | 4761 | #xbeef |
1fa28578 GM |
4762 | => 48815 |
4763 | ||
4764 | *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
4765 | ||
5d94f558 | 4766 | #2R-111 |
1fa28578 | 4767 | => -7 |
5d94f558 | 4768 | #25rah |
1fa28578 GM |
4769 | => 267 |
4770 | ||
3d4ff2dd | 4771 | ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
f98d3086 | 4772 | the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
e9b4e5ff GM |
4773 | and isn't a string. |
4774 | ||
3d4ff2dd GM |
4775 | ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
4776 | a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
4777 | value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
4778 | not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
4779 | ||
16ce590d DL |
4780 | ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
4781 | ||
73825616 | 4782 | ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
16ce590d DL |
4783 | for a regexp in a string. |
4784 | ||
4785 | ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook | |
4786 | `mouse-position-function'. | |
4787 | ||
723e779c GM |
4788 | ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
4789 | that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
4790 | ||
d1e103b2 GM |
4791 | ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
4792 | Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
4793 | ||
31047e0d DL |
4794 | ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and |
4795 | returns it. | |
4796 | ||
7a85e4df GM |
4797 | ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
4798 | returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
4799 | ||
02b14400 RS |
4800 | ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
4801 | can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. | |
3a426197 | 4802 | Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a |
02b14400 RS |
4803 | etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
4804 | mode. | |
404fa7d6 | 4805 | |
8964fec7 SM |
4806 | ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
4807 | and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. | |
4808 | ||
02b14400 RS |
4809 | ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
4810 | has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook | |
4811 | function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it | |
4812 | returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has | |
4813 | been performed." | |
4814 | ||
4815 | When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, | |
4816 | and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the | |
4817 | hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, | |
4818 | then the self-inserting character is not inserted. | |
ef961722 | 4819 | |
81da8b32 GM |
4820 | ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
4821 | In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
4822 | and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
4823 | ||
9e207b90 GM |
4824 | ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
4825 | with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
4826 | specified table. | |
4827 | ||
4828 | (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
4829 | ||
4830 | Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
03d9c64c GM |
4831 | TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
4832 | saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is | |
4833 | what BODY returns. | |
9e207b90 | 4834 | |
d7f89643 | 4835 | ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
95cd4c40 | 4836 | Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
8a33023e | 4837 | Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
601e0081 SM |
4838 | corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
4839 | Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). | |
8964fec7 | 4840 | |
dde9e75a GM |
4841 | ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
4842 | removed since it wasn't used by anything. | |
4843 | ||
9da30515 GM |
4844 | ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
4845 | instead of being optional. | |
4846 | ||
d20679eb GM |
4847 | ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
4848 | modify read-only text. | |
4849 | ||
fbc164de PE |
4850 | ** New functions and variables for locales. |
4851 | ||
4852 | The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and | |
4853 | decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and | |
b718982a PE |
4854 | time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4855 | `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system | |
4856 | locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. | |
fbc164de PE |
4857 | |
4858 | The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language | |
4859 | environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from | |
4860 | the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG | |
b718982a PE |
4861 | environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4862 | not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables | |
4863 | `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and | |
4864 | `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. | |
fbc164de | 4865 | |
863476d1 SM |
4866 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
4867 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | |
4868 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | |
4869 | start sequences. | |
4870 | ||
ef6d912c GM |
4871 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
4872 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. | |
4873 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4874 | ** New function `propertize' |
4875 | ||
4876 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
4877 | strings with text properties. | |
4878 | ||
4879 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
4880 | ||
4881 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
4882 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
4883 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
4884 | specified value of that property. Example: | |
4885 | ||
4886 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
4887 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4888 | ** push and pop macros. |
4889 | ||
02b14400 RS |
4890 | Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
4891 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
a933dad1 DL |
4892 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
4893 | ||
4894 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
4895 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
4896 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
4897 | ||
02b14400 RS |
4898 | ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
4899 | ||
6c7fd5aa RS |
4900 | Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
4901 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. | |
02b14400 RS |
4902 | |
4903 | (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
4904 | Execute body once for each element of LIST, | |
4905 | using the variable VAR to hold the current element. | |
4906 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
4907 | ||
4908 | (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
4909 | Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, | |
4910 | inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. | |
4911 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
4912 | ||
6c083b4c GM |
4913 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
4914 | [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
4915 | class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
4916 | or a sign. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4917 | |
4918 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
4919 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
4920 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
4921 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
4922 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
4923 | space, and DEL. | |
4924 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
4925 | and DEL. | |
4926 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
4927 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4928 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
4929 | [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
4930 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4931 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
4932 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
4933 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
4934 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
4935 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
4936 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
4937 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
4938 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
4939 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
4940 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
4941 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4942 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
4943 | ||
4944 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
4945 | ||
4946 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
4947 | ||
4948 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
4949 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
4950 | ||
4951 | :test TEST | |
4952 | ||
4953 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
4954 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
4955 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
4956 | ||
4957 | :size SIZE | |
4958 | ||
4959 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
4960 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
4961 | ||
4962 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
4963 | ||
4964 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
4965 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
4966 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
4967 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
4968 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
4969 | ||
4970 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
4971 | ||
4972 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
4973 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
4974 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
4975 | ||
4976 | :weakness WEAK | |
4977 | ||
b548072f GM |
4978 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
4979 | `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
4980 | `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
4981 | collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
4982 | outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4983 | |
4984 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
4985 | ||
4986 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
4987 | ||
4988 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
4989 | ||
4990 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
4991 | ||
4992 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
4993 | ||
4994 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
4995 | values are shared. | |
4996 | ||
4997 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
4998 | ||
4999 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
5000 | ||
5001 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
5002 | ||
5003 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
5004 | ||
5005 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
5006 | ||
5007 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
5008 | ||
5009 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
5010 | ||
5011 | Returns the size of TABLE. | |
5012 | ||
d96d6bb0 | 5013 | - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
5014 | |
5015 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
5016 | ||
5017 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
5018 | ||
5019 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
5020 | ||
5021 | - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
5022 | ||
5023 | Clear TABLE. | |
5024 | ||
5025 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
5026 | ||
5027 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
5028 | not found. | |
5029 | ||
79214ddf | 5030 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
5031 | |
5032 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
5033 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
5034 | ||
5035 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
5036 | ||
5037 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
5038 | ||
5039 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
5040 | ||
5041 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
5042 | arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
5043 | ||
5044 | - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
5045 | ||
5046 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
5047 | ||
5048 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
5049 | ||
5050 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
5051 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
79214ddf | 5052 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
a933dad1 DL |
5053 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
5054 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
5055 | ||
5056 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
5057 | ||
5058 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
5059 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
5060 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
5061 | ||
5062 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
5063 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
5064 | ||
5065 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
5066 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
5067 | ||
5068 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
5069 | (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
5070 | ||
79214ddf | 5071 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
a933dad1 DL |
5072 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
5073 | ||
5074 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
5075 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5076 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
5077 | ||
5078 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
5079 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
5080 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
5081 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5082 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
5083 | ||
5084 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
5085 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
5086 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5087 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
5088 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
5089 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
5090 | is too short to reach that column. | |
5091 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5092 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
5093 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
5094 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
5095 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
5096 | ||
5097 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
5098 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
5099 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
5100 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5101 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
5102 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
5103 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5104 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
5105 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
5106 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5107 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
5108 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
5109 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
5110 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
5111 | temporary-file-directory instead. | |
5112 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5113 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
5114 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
5115 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
5116 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
5117 | ||
2018166d DL |
5118 | ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
5119 | elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. | |
a933dad1 | 5120 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5121 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
5122 | ||
5123 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
5124 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
5125 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
5126 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5127 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
5128 | ||
5129 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
5130 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
5131 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
5132 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
5133 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
5134 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
5135 | ||
5136 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
5137 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
5138 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
5139 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
5140 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5141 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
5142 | ||
5143 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
5144 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
5145 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
5146 | result string. | |
5147 | ||
5148 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
5149 | string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
5150 | ||
5151 | Example: | |
5152 | ||
5153 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
5154 | (s2 "world")) | |
5155 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
5156 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
b246b1f6 | 5157 | (format s1 s2)) |
a933dad1 DL |
5158 | |
5159 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
5160 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5161 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
5162 | ||
5163 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
5164 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
5165 | argument in it. | |
5166 | ||
5167 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
5168 | (arg "world")) | |
5169 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
5170 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
5171 | (message msg arg)) | |
5172 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5173 | ** Sound support |
5174 | ||
5175 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
5176 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
5177 | ||
5178 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
5179 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
5180 | to enable sound support. | |
5181 | ||
5182 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
5183 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
5184 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
5185 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
5186 | sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
5187 | ||
5188 | The following sound properties are supported: | |
5189 | ||
5190 | - `:file FILE' | |
5191 | ||
5192 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
5193 | searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
5194 | ||
6fb40beb GM |
5195 | - `:data DATA' |
5196 | ||
5197 | DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
5198 | may be present, but not both. | |
5199 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5200 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
5201 | ||
5202 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
5203 | 0..1. This property is optional. | |
5204 | ||
01242779 DL |
5205 | - `:device DEVICE' |
5206 | ||
5207 | DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
5208 | sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
5209 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5210 | Other properties are ignored. |
5211 | ||
01242779 DL |
5212 | An alternative interface is called as |
5213 | (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
5214 | ||
a933dad1 | 5215 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
356673d4 DL |
5216 | |
5217 | ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
5218 | a keyword symbol. | |
fc91dc2d GM |
5219 | |
5220 | ** Changes to garbage collection | |
5221 | ||
5222 | *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number | |
5223 | of live and free strings. | |
5224 | ||
5225 | *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of | |
5226 | strings that have been consed so far. | |
5227 | ||
05197f40 | 5228 | \f |
04545643 GM |
5229 | * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
5230 | Lisp Manual | |
5231 | ||
a299a6f0 GM |
5232 | ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
5233 | mini-windows. | |
5234 | ||
26fcde61 MB |
5235 | ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
5236 | argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is | |
5237 | returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. | |
ea4c1b7c | 5238 | |
a299a6f0 | 5239 | ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
82a452c8 | 5240 | |
9a8d84ca | 5241 | ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. |
2c69ced2 GM |
5242 | |
5243 | ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an | |
5244 | image. | |
5245 | ||
5246 | - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
5247 | ||
5248 | Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
5249 | ||
5250 | SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
5251 | measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
5252 | character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
5253 | font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
5254 | FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
5255 | ||
ebb8f116 GM |
5256 | ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
5257 | has a mask bitmap. | |
5258 | ||
5259 | - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
5260 | ||
5261 | Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
5262 | FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
5263 | or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
5264 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
5265 | ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
5266 | satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
5267 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
5268 | ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now |
5269 | optional. | |
5270 | ||
f6499c03 DL |
5271 | ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see |
5272 | below). | |
04545643 | 5273 | |
05197f40 | 5274 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
5275 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
5276 | ||
f6d3257b GM |
5277 | ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
5278 | to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
5279 | ||
5280 | Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
5281 | text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
5282 | is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
5283 | your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
5284 | laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
5285 | just display it black instead. | |
5286 | ||
5287 | This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
5288 | a line like | |
5289 | ||
5290 | (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
5291 | ||
5292 | in your `.emacs'. | |
5293 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5294 | ** New face implementation. |
5295 | ||
5296 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
5297 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
5298 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5299 | *** New faces. |
5300 | ||
5301 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
5302 | ||
5303 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
79214ddf | 5304 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5305 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
5306 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
79214ddf | 5307 | |
a933dad1 | 5308 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
79214ddf | 5309 | |
a933dad1 | 5310 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
79214ddf | 5311 | |
a933dad1 | 5312 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
79214ddf | 5313 | |
a933dad1 | 5314 | 6. Foreground color. |
79214ddf | 5315 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5316 | 7. Background color. |
5317 | ||
5318 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
5319 | ||
5320 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
5321 | ||
5322 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
5323 | ||
5324 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
5325 | ||
5326 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
5327 | color. | |
5328 | ||
5329 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
5330 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
5331 | ||
5332 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
5333 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
5334 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
5335 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
0969bd6a | 5336 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
a933dad1 DL |
5337 | attributes mentioned above. |
5338 | ||
5339 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
5340 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
5341 | created frames. | |
79214ddf | 5342 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5343 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
5344 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
5345 | `fully-specified'. | |
5346 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5347 | *** Face merging. |
5348 | ||
5349 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
5350 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
5351 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
5352 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
5353 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
5354 | results in a fully-specified face. | |
5355 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5356 | *** Face realization. |
5357 | ||
5358 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
5359 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
5360 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
5361 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
5362 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
5363 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
5364 | ||
5365 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
5366 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
5367 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
5368 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
5369 | ||
5370 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
5371 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
5372 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
5373 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
5374 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
5375 | ||
5376 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
5377 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
5378 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
5379 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
5380 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
5381 | Emacs. | |
5382 | ||
5383 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
5384 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
5385 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
5386 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
5387 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5388 | **** Clearing face caches. |
5389 | ||
5390 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
5391 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
5392 | unused fonts. | |
5393 | ||
a933dad1 | 5394 | *** Font selection. |
79214ddf | 5395 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5396 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
5397 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
5398 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
5399 | ||
5400 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
5401 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
5402 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
5403 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
5404 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
5405 | ||
5406 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
5407 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
5408 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
5409 | ||
5410 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
5411 | ||
5412 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
5413 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
5414 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
5415 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
5416 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
5417 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
5418 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
5419 | ||
52d89894 GM |
5420 | Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
5421 | alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
89d57763 | 5422 | doesn't exist. |
af4bb4c8 KH |
5423 | |
5424 | Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
8a33023e | 5425 | all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
af4bb4c8 KH |
5426 | registry. |
5427 | ||
8a33023e | 5428 | Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
af4bb4c8 KH |
5429 | slightly different. |
5430 | ||
5431 | Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
5432 | ||
a933dad1 | 5433 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5434 | **** Scalable fonts |
5435 | ||
5436 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
5437 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
5438 | servers. | |
5439 | ||
5440 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
b246b1f6 | 5441 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
a933dad1 DL |
5442 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
5443 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
5444 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
5445 | that list. Example: | |
5446 | ||
5447 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
5448 | ||
5449 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
5450 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5451 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
5452 | ||
5453 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
5454 | ||
5455 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
5456 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
5457 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
5458 | ||
5459 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
5460 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
5461 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
5462 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
5463 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
5464 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
5465 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
5466 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
5467 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
5468 | of the face font sort order. | |
5469 | ||
79214ddf | 5470 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
a933dad1 DL |
5471 | |
5472 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
5473 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
5474 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
5475 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
5476 | ||
5477 | - Variable: font-list-limit | |
5478 | ||
5479 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
5480 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
5481 | matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
5482 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5483 | *** Setting face attributes. |
5484 | ||
5485 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
5486 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
5487 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
5488 | `face-attribute'. | |
5489 | ||
5490 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
5491 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
5492 | ||
5493 | The following attributes are recognized: | |
5494 | ||
5495 | `:family' | |
5496 | ||
5497 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
5498 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
5499 | and `?' are allowed. | |
5500 | ||
5501 | `:width' | |
5502 | ||
5503 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
5504 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
5505 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
5506 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
5507 | ||
5508 | `:height' | |
5509 | ||
787345ff MB |
5510 | VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
5511 | in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to | |
5512 | scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old | |
5513 | height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5514 | |
5515 | `:weight' | |
5516 | ||
5517 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
5518 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
5519 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
5520 | ||
5521 | `:slant' | |
5522 | ||
5523 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
5524 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
5525 | `reverse-oblique'. | |
5526 | ||
5527 | `:foreground', `:background' | |
5528 | ||
5529 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
5530 | ||
5531 | `:underline' | |
5532 | ||
5533 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
5534 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
5535 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
5536 | don't underline. | |
5537 | ||
5538 | `:overline' | |
5539 | ||
5540 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
5541 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
5542 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
5543 | overline. | |
5544 | ||
5545 | `:strike-through' | |
5546 | ||
5547 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
5548 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
5549 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
5550 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
5551 | ||
5552 | `:box' | |
5553 | ||
5554 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
5555 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
5556 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
5557 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
5558 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
5559 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
5560 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
5561 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
5562 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
5563 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
5564 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
5565 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
5566 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
5567 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
5568 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
5569 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
5570 | box. | |
5571 | ||
5572 | `:inverse-video' | |
5573 | ||
5574 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
5575 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
5576 | ||
5577 | `:stipple' | |
5578 | ||
5579 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
5580 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
5581 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
5582 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
5583 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
5584 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
5585 | ||
5586 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
5587 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
5588 | ||
5589 | `:font' | |
5590 | ||
5591 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
5592 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
5593 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
5594 | versions of Emacs. | |
5595 | ||
5596 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
5597 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
5598 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
5599 | ||
5600 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
5601 | `defface'. | |
5602 | ||
787345ff MB |
5603 | `:inherit' |
5604 | ||
5605 | VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list | |
5606 | of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face | |
5607 | like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. | |
5608 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5609 | *** Face attributes and X resources |
5610 | ||
5611 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
5612 | from X resources: | |
5613 | ||
5614 | Face attribute X resource class | |
5615 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5616 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
5617 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
5618 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
5619 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
5620 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
5621 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
5622 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
5623 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
5624 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
5625 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
5626 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
5627 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
5628 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
79214ddf | 5629 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
a933dad1 DL |
5630 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
5631 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
5632 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
5633 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
5634 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
5635 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5636 | *** Text property `face'. |
5637 | ||
5638 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
5639 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
5640 | specification can be | |
5641 | ||
5642 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
5643 | ||
5644 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
5645 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
5646 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
5647 | for face attribute names. | |
5648 | ||
5649 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
5650 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
5651 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
5652 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5653 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
5654 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
5655 | The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
5656 | on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on | |
5657 | the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by | |
a933dad1 | 5658 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
acf3ecb7 | 5659 | `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
a933dad1 DL |
5660 | used to clear the mapping table. |
5661 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
5662 | ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
5663 | ||
5664 | The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', | |
5665 | and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose | |
5666 | type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style | |
5667 | color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame | |
5668 | display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the | |
5669 | old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and | |
5670 | `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for | |
5671 | compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs | |
5672 | should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to | |
5673 | modify their color-related behavior. | |
5674 | ||
5675 | The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for | |
5676 | any frame type. | |
5677 | ||
8a5719f0 EZ |
5678 | ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
5679 | ||
5680 | The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', | |
5681 | `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', | |
5682 | `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', | |
5683 | `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', | |
5684 | `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and | |
5685 | `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular | |
5686 | display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing | |
5687 | the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling | |
5688 | platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. | |
5689 | ||
27009a49 EZ |
5690 | The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular |
5691 | display can display image files. | |
5692 | ||
a933dad1 | 5693 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
a933dad1 | 5694 | |
463cac2d | 5695 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
3b51cca0 MB |
5696 | To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
5697 | the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the | |
5698 | `Inviolable' option. | |
a933dad1 | 5699 | |
d586cf1e | 5700 | The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the |
a933dad1 | 5701 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
d586cf1e | 5702 | Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'. |
a933dad1 | 5703 | |
463cac2d GM |
5704 | ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
5705 | ||
5706 | There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs | |
5707 | buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' | |
59927f88 | 5708 | property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
463cac2d | 5709 | |
9a9dfda8 | 5710 | Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
463cac2d | 5711 | forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
9a9dfda8 | 5712 | to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
463cac2d | 5713 | not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
fc7ac24f GM |
5714 | commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
5715 | boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
5716 | `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
5717 | functions. | |
463cac2d GM |
5718 | |
5719 | Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in | |
9a9dfda8 | 5720 | a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
463cac2d | 5721 | editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
a933dad1 | 5722 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5723 | The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
5724 | ||
59927f88 | 5725 | - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5726 | |
5727 | Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. | |
59927f88 | 5728 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5729 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
5730 | If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the | |
9b2a085d | 5731 | constrained position if that is different. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5732 | |
5733 | If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable | |
5734 | positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument | |
5735 | ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is | |
59927f88 | 5736 | constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5737 | as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
5738 | is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent | |
59927f88 MB |
5739 | fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
5740 | the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
5741 | also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5742 | |
5743 | If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining | |
5744 | NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned | |
5745 | unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like | |
5746 | C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries | |
5747 | only in the case where they can still move to the right line. | |
5748 | ||
59927f88 MB |
5749 | If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
5750 | a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
5751 | ||
5752 | Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
5753 | ||
5754 | - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
9a9dfda8 | 5755 | |
59927f88 | 5756 | Delete the field surrounding POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 5757 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
59927f88 | 5758 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5759 | |
5760 | - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
5761 | ||
5762 | Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. | |
5763 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
5764 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5765 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5766 | field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
5767 | ||
5768 | - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
5769 | ||
5770 | Return the end of the field surrounding POS. | |
5771 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
5772 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
5773 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5774 | then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
5775 | ||
5776 | - Function: field-string &optional POS | |
5777 | ||
5778 | Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. | |
5779 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 5780 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
5781 | |
5782 | - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS | |
5783 | ||
5784 | Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. | |
5785 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 5786 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 5787 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5788 | ** Image support. |
5789 | ||
5790 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
5791 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
5792 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
5793 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
5794 | ||
5795 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
5796 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
5797 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
5798 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
5799 | area. | |
5800 | ||
5801 | IMAGE is an image specification. | |
5802 | ||
5803 | *** Image specifications | |
5804 | ||
5805 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
5806 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
5807 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
35a5514b GM |
5808 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
5809 | described below are ignored. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5810 | |
5811 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
5812 | ||
5813 | `:ascent ASCENT' | |
5814 | ||
576da55d GM |
5815 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
5816 | If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
5d94f558 | 5817 | to use for its ascent. |
576da55d GM |
5818 | |
5819 | If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
5820 | image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
5821 | ||
5d94f558 | 5822 | If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
04545643 GM |
5823 | centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
5824 | of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
5825 | overlays that apply to the image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5826 | |
5827 | `:margin MARGIN' | |
5828 | ||
b30623be GM |
5829 | MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
5830 | as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
5831 | horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5832 | |
5833 | `:relief RELIEF' | |
5834 | ||
5835 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
5836 | around an image. | |
5837 | ||
f864120f | 5838 | `:conversion ALGO' |
a933dad1 | 5839 | |
47e351a3 GM |
5840 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
5841 | ||
5842 | ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
5843 | edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
5844 | ||
5845 | ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
5846 | apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
5847 | nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
5848 | position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
5849 | around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
5850 | neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
5851 | transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
5852 | x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
5853 | below. | |
5854 | ||
5855 | (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
5856 | x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
5857 | x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
5858 | ||
5859 | The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
5860 | resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
5861 | multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
5862 | of the factors' absolute values. | |
5863 | ||
327652be | 5864 | Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
a933dad1 | 5865 | |
47e351a3 GM |
5866 | (1 0 0 |
5867 | 0 0 0 | |
5868 | 9 9 -1) | |
5869 | ||
5870 | Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
5871 | ||
5872 | ( 2 -1 0 | |
5873 | -1 0 1 | |
5874 | 0 1 -2) | |
5875 | ||
ba9eeda1 GM |
5876 | ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
5877 | ``disabled''. | |
5878 | ||
47e351a3 GM |
5879 | `:mask MASK' |
5880 | ||
5881 | If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
5882 | the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
5883 | image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
5884 | background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
8a33023e | 5885 | image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
47e351a3 GM |
5886 | the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
5887 | GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
5888 | image. | |
a933dad1 | 5889 | |
47e351a3 GM |
5890 | If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
5891 | in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
5892 | `:mask nil'. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5893 | |
5894 | `:file FILE' | |
5895 | ||
5896 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
5897 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
5898 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
5899 | may be present in the image specification. | |
5900 | ||
518df5c4 GM |
5901 | `:data DATA' |
5902 | ||
5903 | Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet | |
5904 | supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be | |
5905 | present in an image specification, but not both. All image types | |
5906 | support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. | |
5907 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5908 | *** Supported image types |
5909 | ||
b246b1f6 | 5910 | **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
a933dad1 DL |
5911 | |
5912 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
5913 | properties supported are | |
5914 | ||
5915 | `:foreground FG' | |
5916 | ||
94736c7c GM |
5917 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5918 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. | |
a933dad1 | 5919 | |
46c5af7f | 5920 | `:background BG' |
a933dad1 | 5921 | |
94736c7c GM |
5922 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5923 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5924 | |
5925 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
5926 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
5927 | instead of a `:file' property. | |
5928 | ||
5929 | `:width WIDTH' | |
5930 | ||
5931 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
5932 | ||
5933 | `:height HEIGHT' | |
5934 | ||
5935 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
5936 | ||
5937 | `:data DATA' | |
5938 | ||
5939 | DATA must be either | |
5940 | ||
5941 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
5942 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
5943 | ||
5944 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
5945 | ||
5946 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
5947 | bitmap. | |
5948 | ||
c76e04a8 GM |
5949 | 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
5950 | height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
5951 | in the file. | |
5952 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5953 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
5954 | ||
5955 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
5956 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
5957 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
5958 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
5959 | ||
5960 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
5961 | ||
5962 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
5963 | ||
5964 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
5965 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
5966 | name. | |
5967 | ||
5968 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
5969 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
5970 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5971 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
5972 | to display compressed images. | |
5973 | ||
5974 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
5975 | ||
5976 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
2b8e9c91 GM |
5977 | mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
5978 | mono images are | |
5979 | ||
5980 | `:foreground FG' | |
5981 | ||
94736c7c GM |
5982 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5983 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. | |
2b8e9c91 GM |
5984 | |
5985 | `:background FG' | |
5986 | ||
94736c7c GM |
5987 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
5988 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5989 | |
5990 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
5991 | ||
5992 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
3bd37feb GM |
5993 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
5994 | are: | |
5995 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5996 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
5997 | ||
5998 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
5999 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
6000 | properties defined. | |
6001 | ||
6002 | **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
6003 | ||
6004 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
6005 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
6006 | ||
6007 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
6008 | ||
6009 | `:index INDEX' | |
6010 | ||
6011 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
8a33023e | 6012 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
a933dad1 DL |
6013 | |
6014 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
6015 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
6016 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
6017 | every 0.1 seconds. | |
6018 | ||
6019 | (defun show-anim (file max) | |
6020 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
6021 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
6022 | ||
6023 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
6024 | (when (= idx max) | |
6025 | (setq idx 0)) | |
518df5c4 | 6026 | (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
a933dad1 DL |
6027 | (save-excursion |
6028 | (set-buffer buffer) | |
6029 | (goto-char (point-min)) | |
6030 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
6031 | (insert-image img "x")) | |
6032 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
6033 | ||
6034 | **** PNG, image type `png' | |
6035 | ||
6036 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
6037 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
6038 | properties defined. | |
6039 | ||
6040 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
6041 | ||
6042 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
6043 | ||
6044 | `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
6045 | ||
6046 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
b246b1f6 | 6047 | integer. This is a required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
6048 | |
6049 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
6050 | ||
6051 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
b246b1f6 | 6052 | must be a integer. This is an required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
6053 | |
6054 | `:bounding-box BOX' | |
6055 | ||
6056 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
6057 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
6058 | files. This is an required property. | |
6059 | ||
6060 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
6061 | lisp/gs.el. | |
6062 | ||
6063 | *** Lisp interface. | |
6064 | ||
79214ddf FP |
6065 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
6066 | which are supported in the current configuration. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6067 | |
6068 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
6069 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
6070 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
084cec2f GM |
6071 | manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
6072 | images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6073 | |
6074 | *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
6075 | ||
6076 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
6077 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
6078 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
6079 | define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
6080 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
6081 | buffer. | |
6082 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6083 | ** Display margins. |
6084 | ||
6085 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
6086 | and images. | |
6087 | ||
6088 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
6089 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
6090 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
6091 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
6092 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
6093 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
6094 | of the display margins. | |
6095 | ||
6096 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
6097 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
6098 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
6099 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
6100 | in this file). | |
6101 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6102 | ** Help display |
6103 | ||
6104 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
6105 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
6106 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
6107 | that have a `help-echo' property. | |
6108 | ||
9662da0b | 6109 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
85a8aca9 | 6110 | is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
c20aeb83 GM |
6111 | the window in which the help was found. |
6112 | ||
6113 | If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
6114 | `help-echo' text property was found. | |
6115 | ||
6116 | If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
6117 | POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
6118 | ||
6119 | If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
5ed8d5af | 6120 | the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
c20aeb83 | 6121 | mouse. |
d5aa31d8 | 6122 | |
9662da0b GM |
6123 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
6124 | string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
6125 | ||
6126 | For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
6127 | determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
6128 | property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
6129 | For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
6130 | used as help string. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6131 | |
6132 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
f0298744 DL |
6133 | the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
6134 | causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
a933dad1 | 6135 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6136 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
6137 | ||
6138 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
6139 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
6140 | ||
6141 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
6142 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
6143 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
6144 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
6145 | used. | |
6146 | ||
79214ddf FP |
6147 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
6148 | #'(lambda () | |
a933dad1 | 6149 | (interactive) |
79214ddf | 6150 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 | 6151 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
79214ddf | 6152 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
a933dad1 DL |
6153 | #'(lambda () |
6154 | (interactive) | |
79214ddf | 6155 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 DL |
6156 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
6157 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6158 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
6159 | ||
6160 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
6161 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
6162 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
6163 | is called with one argument, POS. | |
6164 | ||
6165 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
6166 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
6167 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
6168 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
6169 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
6170 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6171 | ** Tool bar support. |
6172 | ||
6173 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
6174 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
6175 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
6176 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
6177 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
6178 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
6179 | ||
6180 | *** Tool bar item definitions | |
6181 | ||
6182 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
6183 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
6184 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
79214ddf | 6185 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6186 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
6187 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
6188 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
6189 | property (see below). | |
79214ddf | 6190 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6191 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
6192 | binding are currently ignored. | |
6193 | ||
6194 | The following properties are recognized: | |
6195 | ||
6196 | `:enable FORM'. | |
79214ddf | 6197 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6198 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
6199 | or disabled. | |
79214ddf | 6200 | |
a933dad1 | 6201 | `:visible FORM' |
79214ddf | 6202 | |
a933dad1 | 6203 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
79214ddf | 6204 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6205 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
6206 | ||
6207 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
6208 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
6209 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
79214ddf | 6210 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6211 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
6212 | ||
6213 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
6214 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
79214ddf | 6215 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6216 | `:image IMAGES' |
6217 | ||
6218 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
6219 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
6220 | meaning of each of the four elements: | |
6221 | ||
6222 | Index Use when item is | |
6223 | ---------------------------------------- | |
6224 | 0 enabled and selected | |
6225 | 1 enabled and deselected | |
6226 | 2 disabled and selected | |
6227 | 3 disabled and deselected | |
79214ddf | 6228 | |
4ba7246d GM |
6229 | If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
6230 | algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
6231 | ||
a933dad1 | 6232 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
79214ddf | 6233 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6234 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
6235 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
6236 | ||
dab96841 | 6237 | The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
d1e68bce DL |
6238 | toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
6239 | to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
6240 | menu bar. | |
dab96841 | 6241 | |
8628686a DL |
6242 | The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
6243 | dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
6244 | buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
6245 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6246 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
6247 | ||
6248 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
6249 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
6250 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
6251 | ||
79214ddf | 6252 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
a933dad1 DL |
6253 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
6254 | ||
6255 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
6256 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
b30623be GM |
6257 | pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
6258 | vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6259 | |
6260 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
6261 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
6262 | ||
6263 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
6264 | ||
6265 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
79214ddf | 6266 | a tool bar item. If |
a933dad1 DL |
6267 | |
6268 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
6269 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
6270 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
6271 | ||
6272 | is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
6273 | ||
6274 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
6275 | ||
6276 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
6277 | item. | |
6278 | ||
6279 | ** Mode line changes. | |
6280 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6281 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
6282 | ||
6283 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
6284 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
6285 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
6286 | ||
6287 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
6288 | a `local-map' text property. | |
6289 | ||
6290 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
6291 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
6292 | ||
6293 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
6294 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
6295 | `local-map' property. | |
6296 | ||
6297 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
6298 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
6299 | example. | |
6300 | ||
54522c9f GM |
6301 | *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
6302 | evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. | |
6303 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6304 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
6305 | variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
6306 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6307 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
6308 | ||
6309 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
6310 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
6311 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
6312 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
6313 | line. | |
6314 | ||
6315 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
6316 | `header-line'. | |
6317 | ||
6318 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
6319 | position in the header-line. | |
6320 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6321 | ** Text property `display' |
6322 | ||
623a0aae GM |
6323 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
6324 | replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
6325 | also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
6326 | the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
a933dad1 DL |
6327 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
6328 | ||
623a0aae GM |
6329 | *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
6330 | ||
6331 | To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
6332 | text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
6333 | ||
6334 | If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
6335 | marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
6336 | the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
6337 | is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
6338 | simpler form STRING as property value. | |
6339 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6340 | *** Variable width and height spaces |
6341 | ||
6342 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
6343 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
6344 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
6345 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
6346 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
6347 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
6348 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
6349 | ||
6350 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
6351 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
6352 | properties described below. | |
6353 | ||
6354 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
6355 | characters having the `display' property. | |
6356 | ||
6357 | - :width WIDTH | |
6358 | ||
6359 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
6360 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
6361 | ||
6362 | - :relative-width FACTOR | |
6363 | ||
6364 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
6365 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
6366 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
6367 | width of that character by FACTOR. | |
6368 | ||
6369 | - :align-to HPOS | |
6370 | ||
6371 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
6372 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
6373 | ||
6374 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
6375 | ||
6376 | - :height HEIGHT | |
6377 | ||
6378 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
6379 | normal line height. | |
6380 | ||
6381 | - :relative-height FACTOR | |
6382 | ||
6383 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
6384 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
6385 | ||
6386 | - :ascent ASCENT | |
6387 | ||
6388 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
6389 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
6390 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
6391 | equal to 100. | |
6392 | ||
6393 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
6394 | ||
6395 | *** Images | |
6396 | ||
6397 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
6398 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
6399 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
6400 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
6401 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
6402 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
6403 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
6404 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
6405 | as display specification. | |
6406 | ||
6407 | *** Other display properties | |
6408 | ||
c9e73000 | 6409 | - (space-width FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
6410 | |
6411 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
6412 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
6413 | integer or float. | |
6414 | ||
c9e73000 | 6415 | - (height HEIGHT) |
a933dad1 DL |
6416 | |
6417 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
6418 | ||
6419 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
6420 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
6421 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
6422 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
6423 | a font is available counts as a step. | |
6424 | ||
6425 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
6426 | as tall as the frame's default font. | |
6427 | ||
6428 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
6429 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
6430 | ||
6431 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
6432 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
6433 | ||
c9e73000 | 6434 | - (raise FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
6435 | |
6436 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
6437 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
6438 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
6439 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
c9e73000 | 6440 | `height' subproperty. |
a933dad1 DL |
6441 | |
6442 | *** Conditional display properties | |
6443 | ||
6444 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
6c6caea2 GM |
6445 | has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies |
6446 | only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the | |
6447 | evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the | |
6448 | conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are | |
6449 | bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where | |
6450 | the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be | |
6451 | different when object is a string. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6452 | |
6453 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
6c6caea2 | 6454 | `(when t . SPEC)'. |
a933dad1 | 6455 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6456 | ** New menu separator types. |
6457 | ||
6458 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
6459 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
6460 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
6461 | to specify other menu separator types. | |
6462 | ||
6463 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
6464 | ||
6465 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
6466 | separator occurs. | |
6467 | ||
6468 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
6469 | ||
6470 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
6471 | ||
6472 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
6473 | ||
6474 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
6475 | ||
6476 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
6477 | ||
6478 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
6479 | ||
6480 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
6481 | ||
6482 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
6483 | ||
6484 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
6485 | ||
f3780fe4 | 6486 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
a933dad1 DL |
6487 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
6488 | ||
6489 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
6490 | ||
6491 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
6492 | ||
6493 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
6494 | ||
6495 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
6496 | ||
6497 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
6498 | ||
6499 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
6500 | ||
6501 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
6502 | ||
6503 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
6504 | ||
6505 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
6506 | ||
6507 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
6508 | ||
6509 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
6510 | ||
6511 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
6512 | ||
6513 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
6514 | ||
6515 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
6516 | ||
6517 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
6518 | the corresponding single-line separators. | |
6519 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6520 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
6521 | ||
6522 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
6523 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
6524 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
6525 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
6526 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
6527 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
6528 | default foreground is black. | |
6529 | ||
6530 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
6531 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
6532 | `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
6533 | ||
6534 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
6535 | settings for scroll bar colors. | |
6536 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6537 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
6538 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
6539 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6540 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
6541 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
6542 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
6543 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
6544 | the original window start. | |
6545 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6546 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
6547 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
6548 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
6549 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6550 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
6551 | ||
6552 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
6553 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
6554 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
6555 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
6556 | ||
6557 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
6558 | fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
6559 | ||
6560 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
6561 | ||
6562 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
6563 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
6564 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
6565 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
6566 | temporarily to nil, for example | |
6567 | ||
6568 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
6569 | (enlarge-window 10)) | |
6570 | ||
79214ddf | 6571 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
a933dad1 | 6572 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
e411ce4b EZ |
6573 | |
6574 | ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS | |
6575 | terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape | |
6576 | to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter | |
6577 | overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is | |
6578 | horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't | |
6579 | support a vertical-bar cursor). | |
76299050 | 6580 | |
3787e12e | 6581 | |
05197f40 | 6582 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6583 | * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
6584 | ||
6585 | ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
6586 | input. | |
6587 | ||
6588 | ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
6589 | ||
6590 | ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
6591 | ||
6592 | ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
6593 | only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
6594 | exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
6595 | (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
6596 | (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
6597 | ||
6598 | ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
6599 | been added. | |
6600 | ||
05197f40 | 6601 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6602 | * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
6603 | ||
6604 | ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
6605 | ||
0cb146bf | 6606 | |
05197f40 | 6607 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6608 | * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
6609 | ||
6610 | ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
6611 | M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
05197f40 | 6612 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6613 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
6614 | ||
6615 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
6616 | ||
6617 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
6618 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
6619 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
6620 | ||
6621 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
6622 | is the one that is used. | |
6623 | ||
6624 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
6625 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
6626 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
6627 | separate from the command's regular output. | |
6628 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
6629 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
6630 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
6631 | the buffer name. | |
6632 | ||
6633 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
6634 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
6635 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
6636 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
6637 | ||
6638 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
6639 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
6640 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
6641 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
6642 | ||
6643 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
6644 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
6645 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
6646 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
6647 | ||
6648 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
6649 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
6650 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
6651 | they never ignore case. | |
6652 | ||
6653 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
6654 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
6655 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
6656 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
6657 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
6658 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
6659 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
6660 | ||
6661 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
6662 | the same format that was used in the file before. | |
6663 | ||
6664 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
6665 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
6666 | ||
6667 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
6668 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
6669 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
6670 | ||
6671 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
6672 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
6673 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
6674 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
6675 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
6676 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
6677 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
6678 | ||
6679 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
6680 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
6681 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
6682 | format. You can now customize these variables. | |
6683 | ||
6684 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
6685 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
6686 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
6687 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
6688 | ||
6689 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
6690 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
6691 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
6692 | ||
6693 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
6694 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
6695 | doesn't have any effect. | |
6696 | ||
6697 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
6698 | not one per buffer. | |
6699 | ||
6700 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
6701 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
6702 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
6703 | ||
6704 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
6705 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
6706 | `auto-show-mode' command. | |
6707 | ||
6708 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
6709 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
6710 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
6711 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
6712 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
6713 | ||
6714 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
6715 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
6716 | ||
6717 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
6718 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
6719 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
6720 | ||
6721 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
6722 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
6723 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
6724 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
6725 | ||
6726 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
6727 | ||
6728 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
6729 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
6730 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
6731 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
6732 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
6733 | ||
6734 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
6735 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
6736 | ||
6737 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
6738 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
6739 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
6740 | `?' on other systems. | |
6741 | ||
6742 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
6743 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
6744 | Unix. | |
6745 | ||
6746 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
6747 | current codepage when it starts. | |
6748 | ||
6749 | ** Mail changes | |
6750 | ||
6751 | *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
6752 | `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
6753 | appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
6754 | non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
6755 | MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
6756 | headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
6757 | latin-1: | |
6758 | ||
6759 | MIME-version: 1.0 | |
6760 | Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
6761 | Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
6762 | ||
6763 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
6764 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
6765 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
6766 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
6767 | buffer-file-coding-system. | |
6768 | ||
6769 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
6770 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
6771 | mail. | |
6772 | ||
6773 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
6774 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
6775 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
6776 | list of possible coding systems. | |
6777 | ||
6778 | ** CC Mode changes | |
6779 | ||
6780 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
6781 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
6782 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
6783 | docstring for details. | |
6784 | ||
6785 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
6786 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
6787 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
6788 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
6789 | lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
6790 | ||
6791 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
6792 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
6793 | ||
6794 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
6795 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
6796 | ||
6797 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
6798 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
6799 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
6800 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
6801 | anonymous classes. | |
6802 | ||
6803 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
6804 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
6805 | ||
6806 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
6807 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
6808 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
6809 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
6810 | ||
6811 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
6812 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
6813 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
6814 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
6815 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
6816 | ||
6817 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
6818 | ||
6819 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
6820 | ||
6821 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
6822 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
6823 | ||
6824 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
6825 | ||
6826 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
6827 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
6828 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
6829 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
6830 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
6831 | ||
6832 | ** Gnus changes. | |
6833 | ||
6834 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
6835 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
6836 | Gnus manual for the full story. | |
6837 | ||
6838 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
6839 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
6840 | group, which is created automatically. | |
6841 | ||
6842 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
6843 | values. | |
6844 | ||
6845 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
6846 | ||
6847 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
6848 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
6849 | ||
6850 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
6851 | `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
6852 | ||
6853 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
6854 | ||
6855 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
6856 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
6857 | ||
6858 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
6859 | ||
6860 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
6861 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
6862 | ||
6863 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
6864 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
6865 | ||
6866 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
6867 | control over simplification. | |
6868 | ||
6869 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
6870 | ||
6871 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
6872 | limit. | |
6873 | ||
6874 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
6875 | ||
6876 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
6877 | ||
6878 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
6879 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
6880 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
6881 | ||
8a33023e | 6882 | *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
3787e12e GM |
6883 | `a' forces normal posting method. |
6884 | ||
6885 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
6886 | -- `W d'. | |
6887 | ||
6888 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
6889 | to a non-nil value. | |
6890 | ||
6891 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
6892 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
6893 | ||
6894 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
6895 | has been added. | |
6896 | ||
6897 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
6898 | ||
6899 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
6900 | ||
6901 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
6902 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
6903 | ||
6904 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
6905 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
6906 | ||
6907 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
6908 | ||
6909 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
6910 | been added. | |
6911 | ||
6912 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
6913 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
6914 | ||
6915 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
6916 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
6917 | ||
6918 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
6919 | ||
6920 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
6921 | ||
6922 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
6923 | ||
6924 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
6925 | ||
6926 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
6927 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
6928 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
6929 | ||
6930 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
6931 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
6932 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
6933 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
6934 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
6935 | ||
6936 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
6937 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
6938 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
6939 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
6940 | ||
6941 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
6942 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
6943 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
6944 | mismatch. | |
6945 | ||
6946 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
6947 | ||
6948 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
6949 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
6950 | ||
6951 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
6952 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
6953 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
6954 | removed from the label. | |
6955 | ||
6956 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
6957 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
6958 | ||
6959 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
6960 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
6961 | ||
6962 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
6963 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
6964 | expressions. | |
6965 | ||
6966 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
6967 | ||
6968 | ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
6969 | ||
6970 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
6971 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
6972 | ||
6973 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
6974 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
6975 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
6976 | ||
6977 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
6978 | changes with a special face. | |
6979 | ||
6980 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
6981 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
6982 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
05197f40 | 6983 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6984 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
6985 | ||
6986 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
6987 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
6988 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
6989 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
6990 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
6991 | ||
6992 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
6993 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
6994 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
6995 | ||
6996 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
6997 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
6998 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
6999 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
7000 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
7001 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
7002 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
7003 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
7004 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
7005 | ||
7006 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
7007 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
7008 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
7009 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
7010 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
7011 | program. | |
7012 | ||
7013 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
7014 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
7015 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
7016 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
7017 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
7018 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
7019 | ||
7020 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
7021 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
7022 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
7023 | was not documented clearly before. | |
7024 | ||
7025 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
7026 | This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
05197f40 | 7027 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7028 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
7029 | ||
7030 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
7031 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
7032 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
7033 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
7034 | ||
7035 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
7036 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
7037 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
7038 | ||
7039 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
7040 | ||
7041 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
7042 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
7043 | ||
7044 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
7045 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
7046 | integers. | |
7047 | ||
7048 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
7049 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
7050 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
7051 | file names and attributes are returned. | |
7052 | ||
7053 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
7054 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
8a33023e | 7055 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
3787e12e GM |
7056 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
7057 | returns the result. | |
7058 | ||
7059 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
7060 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
7061 | ||
7062 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
7063 | ||
7064 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
7065 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
7066 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
7067 | optionally. | |
7068 | ||
7069 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
7070 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
7071 | ||
7072 | ** | |
7073 | The new function process-running-child-p | |
7074 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
7075 | terminal to its own child process. | |
7076 | ||
7077 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
7078 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
7079 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
7080 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
7081 | ||
7082 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
7083 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
7084 | ||
4a389f53 | 7085 | ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
3787e12e GM |
7086 | :included is an alias for :visible. |
7087 | ||
7088 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
7089 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
7090 | to move or copy menu entries. | |
7091 | ||
7092 | ** Multibyte editing changes | |
7093 | ||
7094 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
7095 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
7096 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
7097 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
7098 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
7099 | (setq char (sref str idx) | |
7100 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
7101 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
7102 | ||
7103 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
7104 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
7105 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
7106 | ||
7107 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
7108 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
7109 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
7110 | ||
8a33023e | 7111 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
3787e12e GM |
7112 | |
7113 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
7114 | across the boundary. | |
7115 | ||
7116 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
7117 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
7118 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
7119 | contains 8-bit characters. | |
7120 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
7121 | contains invalid characters. | |
7122 | ||
7123 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
7124 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
7125 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
7126 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
7127 | way. | |
7128 | ||
7129 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
7130 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
7131 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
7132 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
7133 | ||
7134 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
7135 | compose Thai characters in a string. | |
7136 | ||
7137 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
7138 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
7139 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
7140 | menus should always use the third argument. | |
7141 | ||
7142 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
7143 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
7144 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
7145 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
7146 | ||
7147 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
7148 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
7149 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
7150 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
7151 | ||
7152 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
7153 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
7154 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
7155 | echo area contents. | |
7156 | ||
7157 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
7158 | ||
7159 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
7160 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
7161 | requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
7162 | ||
7163 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
7164 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
7165 | means to clear out that attribute. | |
7166 | ||
7167 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
7168 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
7169 | ||
7170 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
7171 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
7172 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
7173 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
7174 | ||
7175 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
7176 | the gap of the current buffer. | |
7177 | ||
7178 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
7179 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
7180 | current buffer. | |
7181 | ||
7182 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
7183 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
7184 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
7185 | it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
05197f40 | 7186 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7187 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
7188 | ||
7189 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
7190 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
7191 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
7192 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
7193 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
7194 | ||
7195 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
7196 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
7197 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
7198 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
7199 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
7200 | ||
7201 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
7202 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
7203 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
7204 | ||
7205 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
7206 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
7207 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
7208 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
7209 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
7210 | results. | |
7211 | ||
7212 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
7213 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
7214 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
7215 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
05197f40 | 7216 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7217 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
7218 | ||
7219 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
7220 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
7221 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
7222 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
7223 | ||
7224 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
7225 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
7226 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
7227 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
7228 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
7229 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
7230 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
7231 | region. | |
7232 | ||
7233 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
7234 | selective undo. | |
7235 | ||
7236 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
7237 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
7238 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
7239 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
7240 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
7241 | ||
7242 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
7243 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
7244 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
7245 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
7246 | ||
7247 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
7248 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
7249 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
7250 | something that most users not do. | |
7251 | ||
7252 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
7253 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
7254 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
7255 | applications. | |
7256 | ||
7257 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
7258 | pasting operations. | |
7259 | ||
7260 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
7261 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
7262 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
7263 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
7264 | `ps-printer-name'. | |
7265 | ||
7266 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
7267 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
7268 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
7269 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
7270 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
7271 | hits a new word. | |
7272 | ||
7273 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
7274 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
7275 | to be confused by TeX commands. | |
7276 | ||
7277 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
7278 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
7279 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
7280 | of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
7281 | ||
7282 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
7283 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
7284 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
7285 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
7286 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
7287 | ||
7288 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
7289 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
7290 | ||
7291 | ** Changes in input method usage. | |
7292 | ||
7293 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
7294 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
7295 | respectively. | |
7296 | ||
7297 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
7298 | ||
7299 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
7300 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
7301 | ||
7302 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
7303 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
7304 | ||
7305 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
7306 | ||
7307 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
7308 | ||
7309 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
7310 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
7311 | ||
7312 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
7313 | given in the following case: | |
7314 | o When you are using a complex input method. | |
7315 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
7316 | ||
7317 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
7318 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
7319 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
7320 | setting it to t is helpful. | |
7321 | ||
7322 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
7323 | ||
7324 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
7325 | keys: | |
7326 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
7327 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
7328 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
7329 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
7330 | environment. | |
7331 | ||
7332 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
7333 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
7334 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
7335 | get | |
7336 | ||
7337 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
7338 | ||
7339 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
7340 | ||
7341 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
7342 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
7343 | ||
7344 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
7345 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
7346 | its owner and group. | |
7347 | ||
7348 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
7349 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
7350 | ||
7351 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
7352 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
7353 | ||
7354 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
7355 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
7356 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
7357 | by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
7358 | ||
7359 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
7360 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
7361 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
7362 | for writing keyboard macros. | |
7363 | ||
7364 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
7365 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
7366 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
7367 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
7368 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
7369 | info. | |
7370 | ||
7371 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
7372 | ||
7373 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
7374 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
7375 | contents only. | |
7376 | ||
7377 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
7378 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
7379 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
7380 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
7381 | ||
7382 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
7383 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
7384 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
7385 | ||
7386 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
7387 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
7388 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
7389 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
7390 | ||
7391 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
7392 | failure if the command produces no output. | |
7393 | ||
7394 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
7395 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
7396 | the mouse. | |
7397 | ||
7398 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
7399 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
7400 | function and variable names. | |
7401 | ||
7402 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
7403 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
7404 | file-coding-system-alist. | |
7405 | ||
7406 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
7407 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
7408 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
7409 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
7410 | according to the current fontset. | |
7411 | ||
7412 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
7413 | ||
7414 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
7415 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
7416 | nonascii-insert-offset. | |
7417 | ||
7418 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
7419 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
7420 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
7421 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
7422 | ||
7423 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
7424 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
7425 | ||
7426 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
7427 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
7428 | ||
7429 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
7430 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
7431 | command keys. | |
7432 | ||
7433 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
7434 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
7435 | ||
7436 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
7437 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
7438 | all variables that have documentation. | |
7439 | ||
7440 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
7441 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
7442 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
7443 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
7444 | it should show; the default is 20. | |
7445 | ||
7446 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
7447 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
7448 | of your input. | |
7449 | ||
7450 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
7451 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
7452 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
7453 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
7454 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
7455 | Newly added options are included as well. | |
7456 | ||
7457 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
7458 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
7459 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
7460 | ||
7461 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
7462 | Customize menu. | |
7463 | ||
7464 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
7465 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
7466 | ||
7467 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
7468 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
7469 | invoked. | |
7470 | ||
7471 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
7472 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
7473 | The default is 1. | |
7474 | ||
7475 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
7476 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
7477 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
7478 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
7479 | sensibly. | |
7480 | ||
7481 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
7482 | ||
7483 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
7484 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
7485 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
7486 | ||
7487 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
7488 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
7489 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
7490 | every night. | |
7491 | ||
7492 | ** Desktop changes | |
7493 | ||
7494 | *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
7495 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
7496 | ||
7497 | *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
7498 | and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
7499 | ||
7500 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
7501 | read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
7502 | ||
7503 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
7504 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
7505 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
7506 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
7507 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
7508 | made invisible again. | |
7509 | ||
7510 | ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
7511 | ||
7512 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
7513 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
7514 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
7515 | toggle. | |
7516 | ||
7517 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
7518 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
7519 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
7520 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
7521 | rmail-default-body-file. | |
7522 | ||
7523 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
7524 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
7525 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
7526 | ||
7527 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
7528 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
7529 | is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
7530 | ||
7531 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
7532 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
7533 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
7534 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
7535 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
7536 | especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
7537 | ||
7538 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
7539 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
7540 | provided by feedmail are: | |
7541 | ||
7542 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
7543 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
7544 | there is also a queue for draft messages | |
7545 | ||
7546 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
7547 | be prompted for confirmation | |
7548 | ||
7549 | **** does smart filling of address headers | |
7550 | ||
7551 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
7552 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
7553 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
7554 | ||
7555 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
7556 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
7557 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
7558 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
7559 | ||
7560 | ** Dired changes | |
7561 | ||
7562 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
7563 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
7564 | ||
7565 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
7566 | run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
7567 | ||
7568 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
7569 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
7570 | for a specified regexp. | |
7571 | ||
7572 | ** VC Changes | |
7573 | ||
7574 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
7575 | conveniently. | |
7576 | ||
7577 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
7578 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
7579 | Dired. | |
7580 | ||
7581 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
7582 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
7583 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
7584 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
7585 | ||
7586 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
7587 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
7588 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
7589 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
7590 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
7591 | ||
7592 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
7593 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
7594 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
7595 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
7596 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
7597 | ||
7598 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
7599 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
7600 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
7601 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
7602 | ||
7603 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
7604 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
7605 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
7606 | ||
7607 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
7608 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
7609 | session to resolve them. | |
7610 | ||
7611 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
7612 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
7613 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
7614 | uses as well). | |
7615 | ||
7616 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
7617 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
7618 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
7619 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
7620 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
7621 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
7622 | using ediff. | |
7623 | ||
7624 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
7625 | ||
7626 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
7627 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
7628 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
7629 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
7630 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
7631 | ||
7632 | ** Frame name display changes | |
7633 | ||
7634 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
7635 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
7636 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
7637 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
7638 | ||
7639 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
7640 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
7641 | menu. | |
7642 | ||
7643 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
7644 | ||
7645 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
7646 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
7647 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
7648 | ||
7649 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
7650 | ||
7651 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
7652 | that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
7653 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
7654 | ||
7655 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
7656 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
7657 | the following line. | |
7658 | ||
7659 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
7660 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
7661 | previously sent input. | |
7662 | ||
7663 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
7664 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
7665 | as the search string. | |
7666 | ||
7667 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
7668 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
7669 | ||
7670 | ** C mode changes | |
7671 | ||
7672 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
7673 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
7674 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
7675 | definition. | |
7676 | ||
7677 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
7678 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
7679 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
7680 | style is still the default however. | |
7681 | ||
7682 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
7683 | ||
7684 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
7685 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
7686 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
7687 | ||
7688 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
7689 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
7690 | ||
7691 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
7692 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
7693 | ||
7694 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
7695 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
7696 | ||
7697 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
7698 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
7699 | ||
7700 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
7701 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
7702 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
7703 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
7704 | ||
7705 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
7706 | ||
7707 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
7708 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
7709 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
7710 | ||
7711 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
7712 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
7713 | expanding dynamically. | |
7714 | ||
7715 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
7716 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
7717 | ||
7718 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
7719 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
7720 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
7721 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
7722 | ||
7723 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
7724 | ||
7725 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7726 | ||
7727 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
7728 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
7729 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
7730 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
7731 | against the first word in the title. | |
7732 | ||
7733 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
7734 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
7735 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
7736 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
7737 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
7738 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
7739 | ||
7740 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
7741 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
7742 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
7743 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
7744 | ||
7745 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
7746 | ||
7747 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
7748 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
7749 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
7750 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
7751 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
7752 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
7753 | ||
7754 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
7755 | Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
7756 | ||
7757 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
7758 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
8a33023e | 7759 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
3787e12e GM |
7760 | |
7761 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
7762 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
7763 | ||
7764 | ** Ispell changes. | |
7765 | ||
7766 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
7767 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
7768 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
7769 | ||
7770 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
7771 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
7772 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
7773 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
7774 | include: | |
7775 | ||
7776 | o URLs are automatically skipped | |
7777 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
7778 | ||
7779 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
7780 | ||
7781 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
7782 | ||
7783 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
7784 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
7785 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
7786 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
7787 | ||
7788 | *** New recursive parser. | |
7789 | ||
7790 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
7791 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
7792 | recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
7793 | ||
7794 | *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
7795 | ||
7796 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
7797 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
7798 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
7799 | ||
7800 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
7801 | ||
7802 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
7803 | ||
7804 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
7805 | ||
7806 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
7807 | ||
7808 | *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
7809 | ||
7810 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
7811 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
7812 | ||
7813 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
7814 | ||
7815 | *** References to external documents. | |
7816 | ||
7817 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
7818 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
7819 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
7820 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
7821 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
7822 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
7823 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
7824 | ||
7825 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
7826 | ||
8a33023e | 7827 | The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
3787e12e GM |
7828 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
7829 | ||
7830 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
7831 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
7832 | ||
7833 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
7834 | ||
7835 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
7836 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
7837 | ||
7838 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
7839 | ||
7840 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
7841 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
7842 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
7843 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
7844 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
7845 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
7846 | more. | |
7847 | ||
7848 | *** Support for the varioref package | |
7849 | ||
7850 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
7851 | ||
7852 | *** New hooks | |
7853 | ||
7854 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
7855 | and citations are created. These hooks are | |
7856 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
7857 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
7858 | ||
7859 | *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
7860 | ||
7861 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
7862 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
7863 | ||
7864 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
7865 | ||
7866 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
7867 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
7868 | fontified, use | |
7869 | ||
7870 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
7871 | ||
7872 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
7873 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
7874 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
7875 | directories that contain the same file name. | |
7876 | ||
7877 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
7878 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
7879 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
7880 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
7881 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
7882 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
7883 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
7884 | directory. | |
7885 | ||
7886 | ** New modes and packages | |
7887 | ||
7888 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
7889 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
7890 | it, but some do not. | |
7891 | ||
7892 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
7893 | code. | |
7894 | ||
7895 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
7896 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
7897 | around in a buffer. | |
7898 | ||
7899 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
7900 | ||
7901 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
7902 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
7903 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
7904 | established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
7905 | ||
7906 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
7907 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
7908 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
7909 | ||
7910 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
7911 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
7912 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
7913 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
7914 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
7915 | the like. | |
7916 | ||
7917 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
7918 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
7919 | ||
7920 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
7921 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
7922 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
7923 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
7924 | ||
7925 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
7926 | ||
7927 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
7928 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
7929 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
7930 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
7931 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
7932 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
7933 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
7934 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
7935 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
7936 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
7937 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
7938 | ||
7939 | Platform-specific modes: | |
7940 | ||
7941 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
7942 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
7943 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
7944 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
7945 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
7946 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
7947 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
7948 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
7949 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
05197f40 | 7950 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7951 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
7952 | ||
7953 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
7954 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
7955 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
7956 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
7957 | ||
7958 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
7959 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
7960 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
7961 | ||
7962 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
7963 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
7964 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
7965 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
7966 | ||
7967 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
7968 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
7969 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
7970 | environment. | |
7971 | ||
7972 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
7973 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
7974 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
7975 | current input method for reading this one event. | |
7976 | ||
7977 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
7978 | now control whether to output certain characters as | |
7979 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
7980 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
7981 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
7982 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
05197f40 | 7983 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7984 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
7985 | ||
7986 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
7987 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
7988 | ||
7989 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
7990 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
7991 | always increases point by 1. | |
7992 | ||
7993 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
7994 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
7995 | ||
7996 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
7997 | ||
7998 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
7999 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
8000 | default value changed. For example, | |
8001 | ||
8002 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
8003 | :type 'integer | |
8004 | :group 'foo | |
8005 | :version "20.3") | |
8006 | ||
8007 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
8008 | :version "20.3") | |
8009 | ||
8010 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
8011 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
8012 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
8013 | `:version' in the top level group. | |
8014 | ||
8015 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
8016 | ||
8017 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
8018 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
8019 | ||
8020 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
8021 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
8022 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
8023 | to themselves. | |
8024 | ||
8025 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
8026 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
8027 | values whatever. | |
8028 | ||
8029 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
8030 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
8031 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
8032 | ||
8033 | ** Frame-local variables. | |
8034 | ||
8035 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
8036 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
8037 | local bindings for that variable. | |
8038 | ||
8039 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
8040 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
8041 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
8042 | parameter name. | |
8043 | ||
8044 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
8045 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
8046 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
8047 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
8048 | ||
8049 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
8050 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
8051 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
8052 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
8053 | ||
8054 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
8055 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
8056 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
8057 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
8058 | See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
8059 | ||
8060 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
8061 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
8062 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
8063 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
8064 | ||
8065 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
8066 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
8067 | ||
8068 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
8069 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
8070 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
8071 | ||
8072 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
8073 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
8074 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
8075 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
8076 | ||
8077 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
8078 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
8079 | empty input. | |
8080 | ||
8081 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
8082 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
8083 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
8084 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
8085 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
8086 | ||
8087 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
8088 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
8089 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
8090 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
8091 | ||
8092 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
8093 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
8094 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
8095 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
8096 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
8097 | ||
8098 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
8099 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
8100 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
8101 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
8102 | ||
8103 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
8104 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
8105 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
8106 | ||
8107 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
8108 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
8109 | was directed to display this buffer. | |
8110 | ||
8111 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
8112 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
8113 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
8114 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
8115 | set-window-configuration. | |
8116 | ||
8117 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
8118 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
8119 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
8120 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
8121 | ||
8122 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
8123 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
8124 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
8125 | ||
8126 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
8127 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
8128 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
8129 | ||
8130 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
8131 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
8132 | ||
8133 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
8134 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
8135 | ||
8136 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
8137 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
8138 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
8139 | ||
8140 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
8141 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
8142 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
8143 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
8144 | ||
8145 | ** Menu changes | |
8146 | ||
8147 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
8148 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
8149 | better supported. | |
8150 | ||
8151 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
8152 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
8153 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
8154 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
8155 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
8156 | ||
8157 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
8158 | ||
8159 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
8160 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
8161 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
8162 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
8163 | ||
8164 | The format is: | |
8165 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
8166 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
8167 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
8168 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
8169 | The supported properties include | |
8170 | ||
8171 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
8172 | item is enabled. | |
8173 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
8174 | item should appear in the menu. | |
8175 | :filter FILTER-FN | |
8176 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
8177 | which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
8178 | It should return a binding to use instead. | |
8179 | :keys DESCRIPTION | |
8180 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
f3780fe4 | 8181 | binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
3787e12e GM |
8182 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
8183 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
8184 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
8185 | keyboard binding. | |
8186 | :key-sequence nil | |
8187 | This means that the command normally has no | |
8188 | keyboard equivalent. | |
8189 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
8190 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
8191 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
8192 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
8193 | value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
8194 | ||
8195 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
8196 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
8197 | ||
8198 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
8199 | ||
8200 | ** New event types | |
8201 | ||
8202 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
8203 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
8204 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
8205 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
8206 | ||
8207 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
8208 | ||
8209 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
8210 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
8211 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
8212 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
8213 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
8214 | forward, away from the user. | |
8215 | ||
8216 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
8217 | ||
8218 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
8219 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
8220 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
8221 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
8222 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
8223 | ||
8224 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
8225 | ||
8226 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
8227 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
8228 | that were dragged and dropped. | |
8229 | ||
8230 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
8231 | ||
8232 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
8233 | ||
8234 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
8235 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
8236 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
8237 | ||
8238 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
8239 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
8240 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
8241 | ||
8242 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
8243 | in Emacs 19 and before. | |
8244 | ||
8245 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
8246 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
8247 | ||
8248 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
8249 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
8250 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
8251 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
8252 | ||
8253 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
8254 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
8255 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
8256 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
8257 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
8258 | ||
8259 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
8260 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
8261 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
8262 | consistent with the new representation. | |
8263 | ||
8264 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
8265 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
8266 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
8267 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
8268 | ||
8269 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
8270 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
8271 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
8272 | ||
8273 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
8274 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
8275 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
8276 | ||
8277 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
8278 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
8279 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
8280 | ||
8281 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
8282 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
8283 | ||
8284 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
8285 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
8286 | ||
8287 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
8288 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
8289 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
8290 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
8291 | ||
8292 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
8293 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
8294 | ||
8295 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
8296 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
8297 | buffer or string being searched. | |
8298 | ||
8299 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
8300 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
8301 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
8302 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
8303 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
8304 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
8305 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
8306 | ||
8307 | *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
8308 | ||
8309 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
8310 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
8311 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
8312 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
8313 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
8314 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
8315 | define-coding-system-alias. | |
8316 | ||
8317 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
8318 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
8319 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
8320 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
8321 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
8322 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
8323 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
8324 | `iso-8859-1'. | |
8325 | ||
8326 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
8327 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
8328 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
8329 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
8330 | ||
8331 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
8332 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
8333 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
8334 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
8335 | ||
8336 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
8337 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
8338 | This function requires a user interaction. | |
8339 | ||
8340 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
8341 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
8342 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
8343 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
8344 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
8345 | select-safe-coding-system. | |
8346 | ||
8347 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
8348 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
8349 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
8350 | was done. | |
8351 | ||
8352 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
8353 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
8354 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
8355 | ||
8356 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
8357 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
8358 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
8359 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
8360 | ||
8361 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
8362 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
8363 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
8364 | converted. | |
8365 | ||
8366 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
8367 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
8368 | ||
8369 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
8370 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
8371 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
8372 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
8373 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
8374 | range of characters. | |
8375 | ||
8376 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
8377 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
8378 | ||
8379 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
8380 | in the current buffer at position POS. | |
8381 | ||
8382 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
8383 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
8384 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
8385 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
8386 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
8387 | binding input-method-function to nil. | |
8388 | ||
8389 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
8390 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
8391 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
8392 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
8393 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
8394 | ||
8395 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
8396 | subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
8397 | ||
8398 | *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
8399 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
8400 | ||
8401 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
8402 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
8403 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
8404 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
8405 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
05197f40 | 8406 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8407 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
8408 | ||
8409 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
8410 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
8411 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
8412 | tree structure. | |
8413 | ||
8414 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
8415 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
8416 | ||
8417 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
8418 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
8419 | in your .emacs file.) | |
8420 | ||
8421 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
8422 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
8423 | ||
8424 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
8425 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
8426 | ||
8427 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
8428 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
8429 | kills the region. | |
8430 | ||
8431 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
8432 | delete the character before point, as usual. | |
8433 | ||
8434 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
8435 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
8436 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
8437 | ||
8438 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
8439 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
8440 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
8441 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
8442 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
8443 | past.) | |
8444 | ||
8445 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
8446 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
8447 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
8448 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
8449 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
8450 | ||
8451 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
8452 | and is an alias for it. | |
8453 | ||
8454 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
8455 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
8456 | ||
8457 | ** Scrolling changes | |
8458 | ||
8459 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
8460 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
8461 | ||
8462 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
8463 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
8464 | where it started. | |
8465 | ||
8466 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
8467 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
8468 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
8469 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
8470 | ||
8471 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
8472 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
8473 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
8474 | recenters the window. | |
8475 | ||
8476 | ** International character set support (MULE) | |
8477 | ||
8478 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
8479 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
8480 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
8481 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
8482 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
8483 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
8484 | ||
8485 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
8486 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
8487 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
8488 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
8489 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
8490 | ||
8491 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
8492 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
8493 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
8494 | language, to make it possible to type them. | |
8495 | ||
8496 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
8497 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
8498 | ||
8499 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
8500 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
8501 | ||
8502 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
8503 | ||
8504 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
8505 | ||
8506 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
8507 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
8508 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
8509 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
8510 | characters for their work until they want to change. | |
8511 | ||
8512 | *** Input methods | |
8513 | ||
8514 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
8515 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
8516 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
8517 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
8518 | support several input methods. | |
8519 | ||
8520 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
8521 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
8522 | work. | |
8523 | ||
8524 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
8525 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
8526 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
8527 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
8528 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
8529 | letter. | |
8530 | ||
8531 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
8532 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
8533 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
8534 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
8535 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
8536 | ||
8537 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
8538 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
8539 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
8540 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
8541 | ||
8542 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
8543 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
8544 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
8545 | the first guess is wrong. | |
8546 | ||
8547 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
8548 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
8549 | ||
8550 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
8551 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
8552 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
8553 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
8554 | ||
8555 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
8556 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
8557 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
8558 | translate automatically to and from either one. | |
8559 | ||
8560 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
8561 | ||
8562 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
8563 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
8564 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
8565 | what you want. | |
8566 | ||
8567 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
8568 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
8569 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
8570 | multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
8571 | ||
8572 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
8573 | character conversion as well. | |
8574 | ||
8575 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
8576 | ||
8577 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
8578 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
8579 | requires using many fonts. | |
8580 | ||
8581 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
8582 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
8583 | ||
8584 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
8585 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
8586 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
8587 | you would use a font. | |
8588 | ||
8589 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
8590 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
8591 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
8592 | ||
8593 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
8594 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
f327c2f9 | 8595 | characters). |
3787e12e GM |
8596 | |
8597 | *** Defining fontsets. | |
8598 | ||
8599 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
8600 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
8601 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
8602 | ||
8603 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
8604 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
8605 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
8606 | standard fontset are created automatically. | |
8607 | ||
8608 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
8609 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
8610 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
8611 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
8612 | name is `fontset-startup'. | |
8613 | ||
8614 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
8615 | The resource value should have this form: | |
8616 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
8617 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
8618 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
8619 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
8620 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
8621 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
8622 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
0969bd6a EZ |
8623 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
8624 | should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
3787e12e GM |
8625 | |
8626 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
8627 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
8628 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
8629 | ||
8630 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
8631 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
8632 | following resource, | |
8633 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
8634 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
8635 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
8636 | Here is the substitution rule: | |
8637 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
8638 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
8639 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
8640 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
8641 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
8642 | ||
8643 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
8644 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
8645 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
8646 | ||
8647 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
8648 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
8649 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
8650 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
8651 | fontsets. | |
8652 | ||
8653 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
8654 | defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
8655 | ||
8656 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
8657 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
8658 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
8659 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
8660 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
8661 | system for new files that you create. | |
8662 | ||
8663 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
8664 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
8665 | whole Emacs session. | |
8666 | ||
8667 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
8668 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
8669 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
8670 | ||
8671 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
8672 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
8673 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
8674 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
8675 | coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
8676 | ||
8677 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
8678 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
8679 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
8680 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
8681 | is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
8682 | ||
8683 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
8684 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
8685 | ||
8686 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
8687 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
8688 | ||
c3518b63 | 8689 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
3787e12e GM |
8690 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
8691 | ||
8692 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
8693 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
8694 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
8695 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
8696 | of the file. | |
8697 | ||
8698 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
8699 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
8700 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
8701 | translated into that character code. | |
8702 | ||
8703 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
8704 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
8705 | ||
8706 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
8707 | ||
8708 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
8709 | the coding system for keyboard input. | |
8710 | ||
8711 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
8712 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
8713 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
8714 | ||
8715 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
8716 | ||
8717 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
8718 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
8719 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
8720 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
8721 | designed to work with terminals. | |
8722 | ||
8723 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
8724 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
8725 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
8726 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
8727 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
8728 | in the corresponding buffer. | |
8729 | ||
8730 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
8731 | ||
8732 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
8733 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
8734 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
8735 | ||
8736 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
8737 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
8738 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
8739 | want to use. | |
8740 | ||
8741 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
8742 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
8743 | ||
8744 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
8745 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
8746 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
8747 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
8748 | ||
8749 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
8750 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
8751 | related information. | |
8752 | ||
8753 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
8754 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
8755 | scripts. | |
8756 | ||
8757 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
8758 | information about the support for a particular language. | |
8759 | You specify the language as an argument. | |
8760 | ||
8761 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
8762 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
8763 | first dash. | |
8764 | ||
8765 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
8766 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
8767 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
8768 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
8769 | ||
8770 | A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
8771 | B big5 (Chinese) | |
8772 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
8773 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
8774 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
8775 | E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
8776 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
8777 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
8778 | K euc-korea (Korean) | |
8779 | R koi8 (Russian) | |
8780 | Q tibetan | |
8781 | S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
8782 | T lao | |
8783 | T tis620 (Thai) | |
8784 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
8785 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
8786 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
8787 | v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
8788 | z hz (Chinese) | |
8789 | ||
8790 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
8791 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
8792 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
8793 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
8794 | ||
8795 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
8796 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
8797 | ||
8798 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
8799 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
8800 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
8801 | Rmail files themselves. | |
8802 | ||
8803 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
8804 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
8805 | ||
8806 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
8807 | for sending mail: | |
8808 | ||
8809 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
8810 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
8811 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
8812 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
8813 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
8814 | ||
8815 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
8816 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
8817 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
8818 | translations. | |
8819 | ||
8820 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
8821 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
8822 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
8823 | without any conversion. | |
8824 | ||
8825 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
8826 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
8827 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
8828 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
8829 | ||
8830 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
8831 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
8832 | ||
8833 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
8834 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
8835 | ||
8836 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
8837 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
8838 | ||
8839 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
8840 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
8841 | in the buffer before point. | |
8842 | ||
8843 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
8844 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
8845 | you are using. | |
8846 | ||
8847 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
8848 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
8849 | ||
8850 | ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
8851 | ||
8852 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
8853 | in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
8854 | ||
8855 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
8856 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
8857 | can become a bottleneck. | |
8858 | ||
8859 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
8860 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
8861 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
8862 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
8863 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
8864 | so useful that the change is worth while. | |
8865 | ||
8866 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
8867 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
8868 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
8869 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
8870 | ||
8871 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
8872 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
8873 | show-paren-mode. | |
8874 | ||
8875 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
8876 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
8877 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
8878 | ||
8879 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
8880 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
8881 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
8882 | ||
8883 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
8884 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
8885 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
8886 | ||
8887 | ** Changes in View mode. | |
8888 | ||
8889 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
8890 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
8891 | ||
8892 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
8893 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
8894 | ||
8895 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
8896 | previous state. | |
8897 | ||
8898 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
8899 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
8900 | ||
8901 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
8902 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
8903 | not just the selected window. | |
8904 | ||
8905 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
8906 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
8907 | turns View mode on or off. | |
8908 | ||
8909 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
8910 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
8911 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
8912 | ||
8913 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
8914 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
8915 | ||
8916 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
8917 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
8918 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
8919 | which version to compare with. | |
8920 | ||
8921 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
8922 | blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
8923 | ||
8924 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
8925 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
8926 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
8927 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
8928 | ||
8929 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
8930 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
8931 | blocks, all of them or none. | |
8932 | ||
8933 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
8934 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
8935 | confirmation first. | |
8936 | ||
8937 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
8938 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
8939 | However, the mode will not be changed if | |
8940 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
8941 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
8942 | not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
8943 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
8944 | ||
8945 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
8946 | ||
8947 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
8948 | these commands do not change the major mode. | |
8949 | ||
8950 | ** M-x occur changes. | |
8951 | ||
8952 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
8953 | it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
8954 | ||
8955 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
8956 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
8957 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
8958 | ||
8959 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
8960 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
8961 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
8962 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
8963 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
8964 | ||
8965 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
8966 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
8967 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
8968 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
8969 | ||
8970 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
8971 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
8972 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
8973 | ||
8974 | ** Outline mode changes. | |
8975 | ||
8976 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
8977 | ||
8978 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
8979 | ||
8980 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
8981 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
8982 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
8983 | was already active. | |
8984 | ||
8985 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
8986 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
8987 | get confused by it. | |
8988 | ||
8989 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
8990 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
8991 | ||
8992 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
8993 | ||
8994 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
8995 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
8996 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
8997 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
8998 | ||
8999 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
9000 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
9001 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
9002 | ||
9003 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
9004 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
9005 | values. | |
9006 | ||
9007 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
9008 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
9009 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
9010 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
9011 | ||
9012 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
9013 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
9014 | can be. The default value is 30. | |
9015 | ||
9016 | ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
9017 | ||
9018 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
9019 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
9020 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
9021 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
9022 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
9023 | behavior. | |
9024 | ||
9025 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
9026 | compose-mail-other-frame. | |
9027 | ||
9028 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
9029 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
9030 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
9031 | buffer that shows the original message. | |
9032 | ||
9033 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
9034 | with separator lines around the contents. | |
9035 | ||
9036 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
9037 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
9038 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
9039 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
9040 | ||
9041 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
9042 | ||
9043 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
9044 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
9045 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
9046 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
9047 | ||
9048 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
9049 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
9050 | /etc/passwd. | |
9051 | ||
9052 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
9053 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
9054 | /etc/passwd. | |
9055 | ||
9056 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
9057 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
9058 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
9059 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
9060 | ||
9061 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
9062 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
9063 | be taken to be magic. | |
9064 | ||
9065 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
9066 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
9067 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
9068 | ||
9069 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
9070 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
9071 | ||
9072 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
9073 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
9074 | ||
9075 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
9076 | ||
9077 | new key dired.el binding old key | |
9078 | ------- ---------------- ------- | |
9079 | * c dired-change-marks c | |
9080 | * m dired-mark m | |
9081 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
9082 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
9083 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
9084 | * u dired-unmark u | |
9085 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
3a426197 | 9086 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? |
3787e12e GM |
9087 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
9088 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
9089 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
9090 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
9091 | ||
9092 | ** Rmail changes. | |
9093 | ||
9094 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
9095 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
9096 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
9097 | each time you run it. | |
9098 | ||
9099 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
9100 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
9101 | ||
9102 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
9103 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
9104 | means to move in the opposite direction. | |
9105 | ||
9106 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
9107 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
9108 | ||
9109 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
9110 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
9111 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
9112 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
9113 | for output. | |
9114 | ||
9115 | ** Gnus changes. | |
9116 | ||
9117 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
9118 | ||
9119 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
9120 | Gnus. | |
9121 | ||
9122 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
9123 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
9124 | ||
9125 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
9126 | article mode line. | |
9127 | ||
9128 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
9129 | ||
9130 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
9131 | ||
9132 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
9133 | ||
9134 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
9135 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
9136 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
9137 | ||
9138 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
9139 | ||
9140 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
9141 | ||
9142 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
9143 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
9144 | ||
9145 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
9146 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
9147 | used to pick articles. | |
9148 | ||
9149 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
9150 | another have been added. | |
9151 | ||
9152 | `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
9153 | ||
9154 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
9155 | generating lines in buffers. | |
9156 | ||
9157 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
3a426197 | 9158 | `C-M-_'. |
3787e12e GM |
9159 | |
9160 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
9161 | ||
9162 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
9163 | ||
9164 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
9165 | ||
9166 | *** Scores can be decayed. | |
9167 | ||
9168 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
9169 | ||
9170 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
9171 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
9172 | ||
9173 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
9174 | the native server. | |
9175 | ||
9176 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
9177 | ||
9178 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
3a426197 | 9179 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. |
3787e12e GM |
9180 | |
9181 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
9182 | ||
9183 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
9184 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
9185 | ||
9186 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
9187 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
9188 | ||
9189 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
9190 | a group. | |
9191 | ||
9192 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
9193 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
9194 | ||
9195 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
9196 | ||
9197 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
9198 | ||
9199 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
9200 | ||
9201 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
9202 | ||
9203 | Use the `Y c' command. | |
9204 | ||
9205 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
9206 | ||
9207 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
9208 | ||
9209 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
9210 | ||
9211 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
9212 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
9213 | ||
9214 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
9215 | ||
9216 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
9217 | ||
9218 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
9219 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
9220 | ||
9221 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
9222 | ||
9223 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
9224 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
9225 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
9226 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
9227 | this issue.) | |
9228 | ||
9229 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
9230 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
9231 | particular news group. This can be done by: | |
9232 | ||
9233 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
9234 | ||
9235 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
9236 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
9237 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
9238 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
9239 | for reading and posting). | |
9240 | ||
9241 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
9242 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
9243 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
9244 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
9245 | there. | |
9246 | ||
9247 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
9248 | default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
9249 | ||
9250 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
9251 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
9252 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
9253 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
9254 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
9255 | ||
9256 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
9257 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
9258 | ||
9259 | ** CC mode changes. | |
9260 | ||
9261 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
9262 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
9263 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
9264 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
9265 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
9266 | loaded. | |
9267 | ||
9268 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
9269 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
9270 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
9271 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
9272 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
9273 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
9274 | ||
9275 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
9276 | of the current buffer. | |
9277 | ||
9278 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
9279 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
9280 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
9281 | ||
9282 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
9283 | style that the Python developers like. | |
9284 | ||
9285 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
9286 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
9287 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
9288 | ||
9289 | ** VC Changes [new] | |
9290 | ||
9614842d | 9291 | *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
3787e12e GM |
9292 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
9293 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
9294 | ||
9295 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
9296 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
9297 | developers. | |
9298 | ||
9299 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
9300 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
9301 | ||
9302 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
9303 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
9304 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
9305 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
9306 | ||
9307 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
9308 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
9309 | ||
9310 | ** Calendar changes. | |
9311 | ||
9614842d JW |
9312 | *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
9313 | subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow | |
9314 | you do this for the year of the selected date, or the | |
9315 | following/previous years. | |
9316 | ||
9317 | *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in | |
9318 | the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i | |
9319 | calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days | |
9320 | each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The | |
9321 | calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a | |
9322 | supposed attribute of God. | |
3787e12e GM |
9323 | |
9324 | ** ps-print changes | |
9325 | ||
2261f14e GM |
9326 | There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
9327 | layout. | |
3787e12e | 9328 | |
2261f14e | 9329 | *** Headers & Footers (subgroup) |
3787e12e | 9330 | |
2261f14e GM |
9331 | Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to |
9332 | be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your | |
9333 | printer system has this behavior, set variable | |
9334 | `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. | |
3787e12e | 9335 | |
2261f14e GM |
9336 | If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a |
9337 | blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the | |
a5d03456 | 9338 | very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
3787e12e | 9339 | |
2261f14e GM |
9340 | The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for |
9341 | setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: | |
3787e12e | 9342 | |
2261f14e GM |
9343 | lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. |
9344 | Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex | |
9345 | printing for your printer. | |
3787e12e | 9346 | |
2261f14e GM |
9347 | setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the |
9348 | setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
3787e12e | 9349 | |
2261f14e GM |
9350 | nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using |
9351 | the setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
3787e12e | 9352 | |
2261f14e GM |
9353 | The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on |
9354 | opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If | |
9355 | `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for | |
9356 | bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, | |
9357 | ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. | |
9358 | This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. | |
9359 | The default value is nil. | |
3787e12e | 9360 | |
2261f14e GM |
9361 | The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame |
9362 | properties alist. Valid frame properties are: | |
3787e12e | 9363 | |
2261f14e GM |
9364 | fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. |
9365 | Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black | |
9366 | color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a | |
9367 | color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which | |
9368 | correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each | |
9369 | float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright | |
9370 | color). The default is 0 ("black"). | |
3787e12e | 9371 | |
2261f14e GM |
9372 | back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). |
9373 | The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). | |
9374 | ||
9375 | shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). | |
9376 | The default is 0 ("black"). | |
9377 | ||
9378 | border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). | |
9379 | The default is 0 ("black"). | |
9380 | ||
9381 | border-width Specify the border width. | |
9382 | The default is 0.4. | |
9383 | ||
9384 | Any other property is ignored. | |
9385 | ||
9386 | Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the | |
9387 | `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for | |
9388 | documentation). | |
9389 | ||
9390 | Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: | |
9391 | `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', | |
9392 | `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', | |
9393 | `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and | |
9394 | `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those | |
9395 | controlling headers. | |
3787e12e | 9396 | |
2261f14e GM |
9397 | *** Color management (subgroup) |
9398 | ||
9399 | If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in | |
9400 | color. | |
9401 | ||
9402 | *** Face Management (subgroup) | |
3787e12e | 9403 | |
2261f14e GM |
9404 | If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, |
9405 | set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face | |
9406 | background should be used. Valid values are: | |
9407 | ||
9408 | t always use face background color. | |
9409 | nil never use face background color. | |
9410 | (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. | |
9411 | ||
9412 | *** N-up printing (subgroup) | |
9413 | ||
9414 | The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per | |
9415 | sheet of paper. | |
9416 | ||
9417 | The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) | |
9418 | between the sheet border and the n-up printing. | |
9419 | ||
9420 | If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around | |
9421 | each page. | |
9422 | ||
9423 | The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled | |
9424 | on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for | |
9425 | `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: | |
9426 | ||
9427 | `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 | |
9428 | 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 | |
9429 | 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 | |
3787e12e | 9430 | |
2261f14e GM |
9431 | `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 |
9432 | 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 | |
9433 | 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 | |
9434 | ||
9435 | `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 | |
9436 | 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 | |
9437 | 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 | |
9438 | ||
9439 | `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 | |
9440 | 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 | |
9441 | 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 | |
3787e12e | 9442 | |
2261f14e GM |
9443 | Any other value is treated as `left-top'. |
9444 | ||
9445 | *** Zebra stripes (subgroup) | |
3787e12e | 9446 | |
2261f14e GM |
9447 | The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or |
9448 | RGB color. | |
9449 | ||
9450 | The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes | |
9451 | continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' | |
9452 | to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): | |
9453 | ||
9454 | `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' | |
9455 | Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
9456 | 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9457 | 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9458 | 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9459 | 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + | |
9460 | 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + | |
9461 | 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + | |
9462 | 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9463 | 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9464 | 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9465 | 10 + 10 + | |
9466 | 11 + 11 + | |
9467 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
9468 | Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
9469 | 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + | |
9470 | 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + | |
9471 | 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + | |
9472 | 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9473 | 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9474 | 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
9475 | 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + | |
9476 | 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + | |
9477 | 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + | |
9478 | 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + | |
9479 | 22 + 22 + | |
9480 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
9481 | ||
9482 | Any other value is treated as `nil'. | |
9483 | ||
9484 | ||
9485 | *** Printer management (subgroup) | |
9486 | ||
9487 | The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by | |
9488 | some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when | |
9489 | `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr | |
9490 | utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set | |
9491 | to "-P". | |
9492 | ||
9493 | The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual | |
9494 | paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's | |
9495 | non-nil, manual feeding takes place. | |
9496 | ||
9497 | The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) | |
9498 | should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means | |
9499 | do so. | |
9500 | ||
9501 | *** Page settings (subgroup) | |
9502 | ||
9503 | If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an | |
9504 | error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size | |
9505 | indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used | |
9506 | instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if | |
9507 | the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated | |
9508 | by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to | |
9509 | `setpagedevice'. | |
9510 | ||
9511 | The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for | |
9512 | printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means | |
9513 | `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). | |
9514 | ||
9515 | The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If | |
9516 | it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be | |
9517 | integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) | |
9518 | specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that | |
9519 | is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than | |
9520 | its TO, are ignored. | |
9521 | ||
9522 | The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd | |
9523 | pages. Valid values are: | |
9524 | ||
9525 | nil print all pages. | |
9526 | ||
9527 | `even-page' print only even pages. | |
9528 | ||
9529 | `odd-page' print only odd pages. | |
9530 | ||
9531 | `even-sheet' print only even sheets. | |
9532 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
9533 | `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll | |
9534 | print only the even sheet of paper. | |
9535 | ||
9536 | `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. | |
9537 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
9538 | `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print | |
9539 | only the odd sheet of paper. | |
9540 | ||
9541 | Any other value is treated as nil. | |
9542 | ||
9543 | If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages | |
9544 | are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by | |
9545 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: | |
9546 | ||
9547 | (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) | |
9548 | ||
9549 | and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and | |
9550 | `ps-n-up-printing', we get: | |
9551 | ||
9552 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 1: | |
9553 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
9554 | nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 | |
9555 | even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
9556 | odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
9557 | even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
9558 | odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
9559 | ||
9560 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 2: | |
9561 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
9562 | nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 | |
9563 | even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 | |
9564 | odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 | |
9565 | even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 | |
9566 | odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 | |
9567 | ||
9568 | *** Miscellany (subgroup) | |
9569 | ||
9570 | The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler | |
9571 | messages should be sent. | |
9572 | ||
9573 | It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in | |
9574 | front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable | |
9575 | `ps-user-defined-prologue'. | |
9576 | ||
9577 | The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. | |
9578 | ||
9579 | The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in | |
9580 | points for line numbers. | |
9581 | ||
9582 | The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line | |
9583 | numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. | |
9584 | ||
9585 | The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which | |
9586 | line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set | |
9587 | to 2, the printing will look like: | |
9588 | ||
9589 | 1 one line | |
9590 | one line | |
9591 | 3 one line | |
9592 | one line | |
9593 | 5 one line | |
9594 | one line | |
9595 | ... | |
9596 | ||
9597 | Valid values are: | |
9598 | ||
9599 | integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are | |
9600 | printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 | |
9601 | is used. | |
9602 | ||
9603 | `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a | |
9604 | zebra stripe is to be printed. | |
9605 | ||
9606 | Any other value is treated as `zebra'. | |
9607 | ||
9608 | The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in | |
9609 | the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if | |
9610 | `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to | |
9611 | 3, the output will look like: | |
9612 | ||
9613 | one line | |
9614 | one line | |
9615 | 3 one line | |
9616 | one line | |
9617 | one line | |
9618 | 6 one line | |
9619 | one line | |
9620 | one line | |
9621 | 9 one line | |
9622 | one line | |
9623 | ... | |
9624 | ||
9625 | The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory | |
9626 | where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. | |
9627 | ||
9628 | The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, | |
9629 | for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
9630 | `ps-font-size'). | |
9631 | ||
9632 | The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, | |
9633 | in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
9634 | `ps-font-size'). | |
9635 | ||
9636 | The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. | |
9637 | ||
9638 | The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the | |
9639 | start and end of a region to cut out when printing. | |
3787e12e GM |
9640 | |
9641 | ** hideshow changes. | |
9642 | ||
9643 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
9644 | C++, ; for lisp). | |
9645 | ||
9646 | *** Support for java-mode added. | |
9647 | ||
9648 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
9649 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
9650 | ||
f3780fe4 | 9651 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
3787e12e GM |
9652 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
9653 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
9654 | ||
9655 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
9656 | robust and a lot faster. | |
9657 | ||
9658 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
9659 | ||
9660 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
9661 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
9662 | documentation for more details. | |
9663 | ||
9664 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
9665 | ||
9666 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
9667 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
9668 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
9669 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
9670 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
9671 | ||
9672 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
9673 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
9674 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
9675 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
9676 | ||
9677 | ** Font Lock mode | |
9678 | ||
9679 | *** Custom support | |
9680 | ||
9681 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
9682 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
9683 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
9684 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
9685 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
9686 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
9687 | ||
9688 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
9689 | ||
9690 | *** Maximum decoration | |
9691 | ||
9692 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
9693 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
9694 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
9695 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
9696 | to get the old behavior. | |
9697 | ||
9698 | *** New support | |
9699 | ||
9700 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
9701 | ||
9702 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
9703 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
9704 | ||
9705 | *** Configurable support | |
9706 | ||
9707 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
9708 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
9709 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
9710 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
9711 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
9712 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
9713 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
9714 | ||
9715 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
9716 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
9717 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
9718 | ||
9719 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
9720 | ||
9721 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
9722 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
9723 | for any mode. | |
9724 | ||
9725 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
9726 | ||
9727 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
9728 | ||
9729 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
9730 | ||
9731 | *** New faces | |
9732 | ||
9733 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
9734 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
9735 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
9736 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
9737 | ||
9738 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
9739 | ||
9740 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
9741 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
9742 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
9743 | ||
9744 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
9745 | ||
9746 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
9747 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
9748 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
9749 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
9750 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
9751 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
dfd67a62 | 9752 | Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode. |
3787e12e GM |
9753 | |
9754 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
9755 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
9756 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
9757 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
9758 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
9759 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
9760 | ||
9761 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
9762 | ||
9763 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
9764 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
9765 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
9766 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
9767 | ||
9768 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
9769 | settings. | |
9770 | ||
9771 | ** Ada mode changes. | |
9772 | ||
9773 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
9774 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
9775 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
9776 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
9777 | stubs. | |
9778 | ||
9779 | *** There are two new commands: | |
9780 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
9781 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
9782 | ||
9783 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
9784 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
9785 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
9786 | ||
9787 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
9788 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
9789 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
9790 | ||
9791 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
9792 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
9793 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
9794 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
9795 | ||
9796 | ** Scheme mode changes. | |
9797 | ||
9798 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
9799 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
9800 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
9801 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
9802 | have any effect. | |
9803 | ||
9804 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
9805 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
9806 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
9807 | variables as buffer-local variables. | |
9808 | ||
9809 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
9810 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
9811 | ||
9812 | ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
9813 | ||
9814 | *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
9815 | USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
9816 | associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
9817 | can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
9818 | ||
9819 | *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
9820 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
9821 | buffer in Emacs. | |
9822 | ||
9823 | *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
9824 | use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
9825 | ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
9826 | option takes precedence. | |
9827 | ||
9828 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
9829 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
9830 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
9831 | ||
9832 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
9833 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
9834 | the current defun. | |
9835 | ||
9836 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
9837 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
9838 | ||
9839 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
9840 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
9841 | necessary). | |
9842 | ||
9843 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
9844 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
9845 | these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
9846 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
9847 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
9848 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
9849 | ||
9850 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
9851 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
9852 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
9853 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
9854 | ||
9855 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
9856 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
9857 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
9858 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
9859 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
9860 | ||
9861 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
9862 | since it applies only to the current frame. | |
9863 | ||
9864 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
9865 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
9866 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
9867 | ||
9868 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
9869 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
9870 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
9871 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
9872 | instead of just the file you are editing. | |
9873 | ||
9874 | ** RefTeX mode | |
9875 | ||
9876 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
9877 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
9878 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
9879 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
9880 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
9881 | ||
9882 | C-c ( reftex-label | |
9883 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
9884 | knows which kind of label is needed. | |
9885 | ||
9886 | C-c ) reftex-reference | |
9887 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
9888 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
9889 | ||
9890 | C-c [ reftex-citation | |
9891 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
9892 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
9893 | ||
9894 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
9895 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
9896 | ||
9897 | C-c = reftex-toc | |
9898 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
9899 | can quickly jump to every section. | |
9900 | ||
9901 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
9902 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
9903 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
9904 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
9905 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
9906 | ||
9907 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
9908 | ||
9909 | *** Info documentation is now available. | |
9910 | ||
9911 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
9912 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
9913 | ||
9914 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
9915 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
9916 | ||
9917 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
9918 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
9919 | ||
9920 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
9921 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
9922 | appropriate functions. | |
9923 | ||
9924 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
3a426197 | 9925 | entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. |
3787e12e GM |
9926 | |
9927 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
9928 | been cleaned. | |
9929 | ||
9930 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
9931 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
9932 | ||
9933 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
9934 | shall be delimited. | |
9935 | ||
9936 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
9937 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
9938 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
9939 | ||
9940 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
9941 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
9942 | prefixed with `ALT'. | |
9943 | ||
9944 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
9945 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
9946 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
9947 | documentation). | |
9948 | ||
9949 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
9950 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
9951 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
9952 | ||
9953 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
9954 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
9955 | ||
9956 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
9957 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
9958 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
9959 | ||
9960 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
9961 | ||
9962 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
9963 | ||
9964 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
9965 | from alien sources. | |
9966 | ||
9967 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
9968 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
9969 | crossref entries. | |
9970 | ||
9971 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
9972 | region. | |
9973 | ||
9974 | *** Added support for imenu. | |
9975 | ||
9976 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
9977 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
9978 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
9979 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
9980 | ||
9981 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
9982 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
9983 | ||
9984 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
9985 | ||
9986 | ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
9987 | ||
9988 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
9989 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
9990 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
9991 | as an argument. | |
9992 | ||
9993 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
9994 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
9995 | ||
9996 | ** browse-url changes | |
9997 | ||
9998 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
9999 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
10000 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
10001 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
10002 | customization variables. | |
10003 | ||
10004 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
10005 | ||
10006 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
10007 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
10008 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
10009 | ||
10010 | ** Changes in Ediff | |
10011 | ||
10012 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
10013 | pops up the Info file for this command. | |
10014 | ||
10015 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
10016 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
10017 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
10018 | directories). | |
10019 | ||
10020 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
10021 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
10022 | files in the same directory. | |
10023 | ||
10024 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
10025 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
10026 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
10027 | ||
10028 | ** Changes in Viper | |
10029 | ||
10030 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
10031 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
10032 | instead of vip-. | |
10033 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
10034 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
10035 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
10036 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
10037 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
10038 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
10039 | color when Viper is in insert state. | |
10040 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
10041 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
10042 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
10043 | ||
10044 | ** Etags changes. | |
10045 | ||
10046 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
10047 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
10048 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
10049 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
10050 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
10051 | ||
10052 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
10053 | ||
10054 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
10055 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
10056 | ||
10057 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
10058 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
10059 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
10060 | ||
10061 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
10062 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
10063 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
10064 | methods and protocols. | |
10065 | ||
10066 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
10067 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
10068 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
10069 | paragraph name. | |
10070 | ||
10071 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
10072 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
10073 | at least M times and as many as N times. | |
10074 | ||
10075 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
10076 | in files has changed slightly. | |
10077 | ||
10078 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
10079 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
10080 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
10081 | with old time-stamp-format values. | |
10082 | ||
10083 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
10084 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
10085 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
10086 | reasons. | |
10087 | ||
10088 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
10089 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
10090 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
10091 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
10092 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
10093 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
10094 | ||
10095 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
10096 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
10097 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
10098 | ||
10099 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
10100 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
10101 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
10102 | recommended now will continue to work then. | |
10103 | ||
10104 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
10105 | details. | |
10106 | ||
10107 | ** There are some additional major modes: | |
10108 | ||
10109 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
10110 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
10111 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
10112 | ||
10113 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
10114 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
10115 | into Emacs. | |
10116 | ||
10117 | ** New Lisp packages include: | |
10118 | ||
10119 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
10120 | ||
10121 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
10122 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
10123 | ||
10124 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
10125 | ||
10126 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
10127 | in shell buffers. | |
10128 | ||
10129 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
10130 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
10131 | and `elint-defun'. | |
10132 | ||
10133 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
10134 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
10135 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
10136 | strings or comments. | |
10137 | ||
10138 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
10139 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
10140 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
10141 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
10142 | at these points. | |
10143 | ||
10144 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
10145 | can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
10146 | ||
10147 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
10148 | Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
10149 | ||
10150 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
10151 | ||
10152 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
10153 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
10154 | ||
10155 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
10156 | ||
10157 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
10158 | ||
10159 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
10160 | ||
10161 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
10162 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
10163 | ||
10164 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
10165 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
10166 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
10167 | original place after inserting the copy. | |
10168 | ||
10169 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
10170 | on the buffer. | |
10171 | ||
10172 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
10173 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
10174 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
10175 | ||
10176 | Enable mouse-drag with: | |
10177 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
10178 | -or- | |
10179 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
10180 | ||
10181 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
10182 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
10183 | ||
10184 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
10185 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
10186 | ||
10187 | *** ogonek | |
10188 | ||
10189 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
10190 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
10191 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
10192 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
10193 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
10194 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
10195 | instance) and vice versa. | |
10196 | ||
10197 | To use this package load it using | |
10198 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
10199 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
10200 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
10201 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
10202 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
10203 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
10204 | ||
10205 | *** Interface to ph. | |
10206 | ||
10207 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
10208 | ||
10209 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
10210 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
10211 | these servers. | |
10212 | ||
10213 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
10214 | ||
10215 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
10216 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
10217 | while the real cursor does not move. | |
10218 | ||
10219 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
10220 | for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
10221 | ||
10222 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
10223 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
10224 | ||
10225 | ** movemail change | |
10226 | ||
10227 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
10228 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
10229 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
10230 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
10231 | ||
10232 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
05197f40 | 10233 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
10234 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
10235 | ||
10236 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
10237 | ||
10238 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
10239 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
10240 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
10241 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
10242 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
10243 | ||
10244 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
10245 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
10246 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
10247 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
10248 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
10249 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
05197f40 | 10250 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
10251 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
10252 | ||
10253 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
10254 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
10255 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
10256 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
10257 | ||
10258 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
10259 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
10260 | ||
10261 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
10262 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
10263 | "win". | |
10264 | ||
10265 | ** Basic Lisp changes | |
10266 | ||
10267 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
10268 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
10269 | ||
10270 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
10271 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
10272 | or by the user. | |
10273 | ||
10274 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
10275 | ||
10276 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
10277 | ||
10278 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
10279 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
10280 | ||
10281 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
10282 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
10283 | its argument. | |
10284 | ||
10285 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
10286 | ||
10287 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
10288 | ||
10289 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
10290 | ||
10291 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
10292 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
10293 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
10294 | `format' function. | |
10295 | ||
10296 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
10297 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
10298 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
10299 | ||
10300 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
10301 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
10302 | adding one of these suffixes. | |
10303 | ||
10304 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
10305 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
10306 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
10307 | ||
10308 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
10309 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
10310 | ||
10311 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
10312 | ||
10313 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
10314 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
10315 | ||
10316 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
10317 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
10318 | ||
10319 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
10320 | ||
10321 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
10322 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
10323 | ||
10324 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
10325 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
10326 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
10327 | works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
10328 | ||
10329 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
10330 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
10331 | of the last form. | |
10332 | ||
10333 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
10334 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
10335 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
10336 | as the last form. | |
10337 | ||
10338 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
10339 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
10340 | matches. | |
10341 | ||
10342 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
10343 | ||
10344 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
10345 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
10346 | Then it returns that string. | |
10347 | ||
10348 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
10349 | ||
10350 | (with-output-to-string | |
10351 | (princ "The buffer is ") | |
10352 | (princ (buffer-name))) | |
10353 | ||
10354 | returns "The buffer is foo". | |
10355 | ||
10356 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
10357 | is non-nil. | |
10358 | ||
10359 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
10360 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
10361 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
10362 | ||
10363 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
10364 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
10365 | ||
10366 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
10367 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
10368 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
10369 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
10370 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
10371 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
10372 | ||
10373 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
10374 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
10375 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
10376 | characters". | |
10377 | ||
10378 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
10379 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
10380 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
10381 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
10382 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
10383 | ||
10384 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
10385 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
10386 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
10387 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
10388 | ||
10389 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
10390 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
10391 | ||
10392 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
10393 | ||
10394 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
10395 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
10396 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
10397 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
10398 | guaranteed. | |
10399 | ||
10400 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
10401 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
10402 | character). | |
10403 | ||
10404 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
10405 | ||
10406 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
10407 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
10408 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
10409 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
10410 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
10411 | ||
10412 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
10413 | ||
10414 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
10415 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
10416 | more than the number of characters. | |
10417 | ||
10418 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
10419 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
10420 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
10421 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
10422 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
10423 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
10424 | ||
10425 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
10426 | and returns a string containing those characters. | |
10427 | ||
10428 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
10429 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
10430 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
10431 | character, sref signals an error. | |
10432 | ||
10433 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
10434 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
10435 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
10436 | ||
10437 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
10438 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
10439 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
10440 | ||
10441 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
10442 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
10443 | to a vector of the characters in it. | |
10444 | ||
10445 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
10446 | of a string. You call it as follows: | |
10447 | ||
10448 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
10449 | ||
10450 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
10451 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
10452 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
10453 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
10454 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
10455 | ||
10456 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
10457 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
10458 | ||
10459 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
10460 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
10461 | ||
10462 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
10463 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
10464 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
10465 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
10466 | ||
10467 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
10468 | ||
10469 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
10470 | ||
10471 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
10472 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
10473 | are not included in the resulting value. | |
10474 | ||
10475 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
10476 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
10477 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
10478 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
10479 | ||
10480 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
10481 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
10482 | character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
10483 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
10484 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
10485 | column START-COLUMN. | |
10486 | ||
10487 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
10488 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
10489 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
10490 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
10491 | changed text, before the change. | |
10492 | ||
10493 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
10494 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
10495 | one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
10496 | ||
10497 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
10498 | ||
10499 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
10500 | ||
10501 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
10502 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
10503 | ||
10504 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
10505 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
10506 | which identify the character within that character set. | |
10507 | ||
10508 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
10509 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
10510 | opposite of split-char. | |
10511 | ||
10512 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
10513 | of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
10514 | ||
10515 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
10516 | of all the characters in a string. | |
10517 | ||
10518 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
10519 | and specifying coding systems. | |
10520 | ||
10521 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
10522 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
10523 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
10524 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
10525 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
10526 | as what to do about code conversion.) | |
10527 | ||
10528 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
10529 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
10530 | ||
10531 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
10532 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
10533 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
10534 | ||
10535 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
10536 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
10537 | to match against a file name. | |
10538 | ||
10539 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
10540 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
10541 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
10542 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
10543 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
10544 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
10545 | ||
10546 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
10547 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
10548 | ||
10549 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
10550 | the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
10551 | ||
10552 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
10553 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
10554 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
10555 | service names. | |
10556 | ||
10557 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
10558 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
10559 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
10560 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
10561 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
10562 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
10563 | ||
10564 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
10565 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
10566 | ||
10567 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
10568 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
10569 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
10570 | start the subprocess. | |
10571 | ||
10572 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
10573 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
10574 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
10575 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
10576 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
10577 | ||
10578 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
10579 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
10580 | subprocess. | |
10581 | ||
10582 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
10583 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
10584 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
10585 | connection permanently or until overridden. | |
10586 | ||
10587 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
10588 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
10589 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
10590 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
10591 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
10592 | system for one operation at a time. | |
10593 | ||
10594 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
10595 | files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
10596 | ||
10597 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
10598 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
10599 | The value is a cons cell, | |
10600 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
10601 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
10602 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
10603 | input to the subprocess. | |
10604 | ||
10605 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
10606 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
10607 | ||
10608 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
10609 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
10610 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
10611 | ||
10612 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
10613 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
10614 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
10615 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
10616 | customization. | |
10617 | ||
10618 | Thus, instead of writing | |
10619 | ||
10620 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
10621 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
10622 | ||
10623 | you would now write this: | |
10624 | ||
10625 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
10626 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
10627 | :type 'boolean | |
10628 | :group foo) | |
10629 | ||
10630 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
10631 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
10632 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
10633 | for a description of them. | |
10634 | ||
10635 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
10636 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
10637 | ||
10638 | (defgroup ispell nil | |
10639 | "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
10640 | :group 'processes) | |
10641 | ||
10642 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
10643 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
10644 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
10645 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
10646 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
10647 | ||
10648 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
10649 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
10650 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
10651 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
10652 | first-level subgroups. | |
10653 | ||
10654 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
10655 | ||
10656 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
10657 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
10658 | ||
10659 | ** easy-mmode | |
10660 | ||
10661 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
10662 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
10663 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
10664 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
10665 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
10666 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
10667 | ||
10668 | ** Text property changes | |
10669 | ||
10670 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
10671 | text property. | |
10672 | ||
10673 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
10674 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
10675 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
10676 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
10677 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
10678 | ||
10679 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
10680 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
10681 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
10682 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
10683 | ||
10684 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
10685 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
10686 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
10687 | ||
10688 | ** Changes in invisibility features | |
10689 | ||
10690 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
10691 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
10692 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
10693 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
10694 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
10695 | make the overlay visible. | |
10696 | ||
10697 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
10698 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
10699 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
10700 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
10701 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
10702 | t when it should hide it. | |
10703 | ||
10704 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
10705 | ||
10706 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
10707 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
10708 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
10709 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
10710 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
10711 | Here is an example of how to do this: | |
10712 | ||
10713 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
10714 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
10715 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
10716 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
10717 | ||
10718 | ... | |
10719 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
10720 | ||
10721 | ... | |
10722 | ;; When done with the overlays: | |
10723 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
10724 | ;; Or respectively: | |
10725 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
10726 | ||
10727 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
10728 | ||
10729 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
10730 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
10731 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
10732 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
10733 | ||
10734 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
10735 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
10736 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
10737 | ||
10738 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
10739 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
10740 | ||
10741 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
10742 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
10743 | ||
10744 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
10745 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
10746 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
10747 | ||
10748 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
10749 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
10750 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
10751 | determine the syntax type of the character. | |
10752 | ||
10753 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
10754 | of the current buffer. | |
10755 | ||
10756 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
10757 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
10758 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
10759 | ||
10760 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
10761 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
10762 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
10763 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
10764 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
10765 | ||
10766 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
10767 | text property. | |
10768 | ||
10769 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
10770 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
10771 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
10772 | ||
10773 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
10774 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
10775 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
10776 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
10777 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
10778 | ||
10779 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
10780 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
10781 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
10782 | ||
10783 | ** Changes in face features | |
10784 | ||
10785 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
10786 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
10787 | ||
10788 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
10789 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
10790 | ||
10791 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
10792 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
10793 | ||
10794 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
10795 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
10796 | ||
10797 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
10798 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
10799 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
10800 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
10801 | overlay property). | |
10802 | ||
10803 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
10804 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
10805 | ||
10806 | ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
10807 | ||
10808 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
10809 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
10810 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
10811 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
10812 | ||
10813 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
10814 | begins with ~. | |
10815 | ||
10816 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
10817 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
10818 | ||
10819 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
10820 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
10821 | ||
10822 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
10823 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
10824 | ||
10825 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
10826 | character code conversion as well as other things. | |
10827 | ||
10828 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
10829 | (formerly it did not). | |
10830 | ||
10831 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
10832 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
10833 | ||
10834 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
10835 | instead of constant strings. | |
10836 | ||
10837 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
10838 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
10839 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
10840 | ||
10841 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
10842 | in the same way as before. | |
10843 | ||
10844 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
10845 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
10846 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
10847 | ||
10848 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
10849 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
10850 | else, and returns nil. | |
10851 | ||
10852 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
10853 | directory cannot be listed. | |
10854 | ||
10855 | ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
10856 | ||
10857 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
10858 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
10859 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
10860 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
10861 | ways: | |
10862 | ||
10863 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
10864 | It is available through the history command M-n. | |
10865 | ||
10866 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
10867 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
10868 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
10869 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
10870 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
10871 | ||
10872 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
10873 | argument in this way. | |
10874 | ||
10875 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
10876 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
10877 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
10878 | ||
10879 | ** Echo area features | |
10880 | ||
10881 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
10882 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
10883 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
10884 | after the echo area is cleared. | |
10885 | ||
10886 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
10887 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
10888 | ||
10889 | ** Keyboard input features | |
10890 | ||
10891 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
10892 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
10893 | ||
10894 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
10895 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
10896 | by keyboard macros. | |
10897 | ||
10898 | ** Frame-related changes | |
10899 | ||
10900 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
10901 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
10902 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
10903 | ||
10904 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
10905 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
10906 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
10907 | ||
10908 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
10909 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
10910 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
10911 | in the selected frame. | |
10912 | ||
10913 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
10914 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
10915 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
10916 | ||
10917 | ** X Windows features | |
10918 | ||
10919 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
10920 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
10921 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
10922 | ||
10923 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
10924 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
10925 | ||
10926 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
10927 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
10928 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
10929 | ||
10930 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
10931 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
10932 | ||
10933 | ** Subprocess features | |
10934 | ||
10935 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
10936 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
10937 | automatically. | |
10938 | ||
10939 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
10940 | and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
10941 | ||
10942 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
10943 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
10944 | ||
10945 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
10946 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
10947 | ||
10948 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
10949 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
10950 | goes after the other menu items. | |
10951 | ||
10952 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
10953 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
10954 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
10955 | are in use. | |
10956 | ||
10957 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
10958 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
10959 | ||
10960 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
10961 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
10962 | form. | |
10963 | ||
10964 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
10965 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
10966 | but its hook is still run. | |
10967 | ||
10968 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
10969 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
10970 | ||
10971 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
10972 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
10973 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
10974 | ||
10975 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
10976 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
10977 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
10978 | warned. | |
10979 | ||
10980 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
10981 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
10982 | ||
10983 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
10984 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
10985 | functions like display-time. | |
10986 | ||
10987 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
10988 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
10989 | ||
10990 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
10991 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
10992 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
10993 | ||
10994 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
10995 | if there is an error in compilation. | |
10996 | ||
10997 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
10998 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
10999 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
11000 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
11001 | ||
11002 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
11003 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
11004 | the *scratch* buffer. | |
11005 | ||
11006 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
11007 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
11008 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
11009 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
11010 | ||
11011 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
11012 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
11013 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
11014 | ||
11015 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
11016 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
11017 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
11018 | and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
11019 | ||
11020 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
11021 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
11022 | full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
11023 | ||
11024 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
11025 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
11026 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
11027 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
11028 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
11029 | files at all. | |
11030 | ||
11031 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
11032 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
11033 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
11034 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
11035 | ||
11036 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
11037 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
11038 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
11039 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
11040 | ||
11041 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
11042 | ||
11043 | ** imenu.el changes. | |
11044 | ||
11045 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
11046 | item from menu created by imenu. | |
11047 | ||
11048 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
11049 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
11050 | select one of those items. | |
05197f40 | 11051 | \f |
3787e12e | 11052 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 DL |
11053 | |
11054 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
11055 | Copyright information: | |
11056 | ||
fc2938d1 | 11057 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
11058 | |
11059 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
11060 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
11061 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
11062 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
11063 | ||
11064 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
11065 | of this document, or of portions of it, | |
11066 | under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
11067 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
05197f40 | 11068 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
11069 | Local variables: |
11070 | mode: outline | |
11071 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" | |
11072 | end: |